Infor Campus Course Library


Welcome

Our course list below pulls continuously from the Campus Course Catalog, giving you the most up to date view of our classroom and eLearning courses. Clicking on any course title will send you directly to the registration page for that course after logging in to Infor Campus. Customers and Infor partners who have not logged in before should click on the "Forgot your password?" link, enter your email address and click Submit. A new password will come to you via email. Employees using these links will need to login using their Infor user name and out of network password. If you do not know your out of network password, you will also use the "Forgot your password?" link to generate one and have it sent to you via email.

You may use the drop-down menus above the Course Name and Type columns to narrow your search or enter any keyword to search through the Description field.


   
Cloverleaf: Implementation - Advanced Classroom This course expands on principles learned in the Cloverleaf: Basics and Cloverleaf: Intermediate classes and introduces advanced principles of designing, implementing, and managing Cloverleaf networks. This training is for version 6.0 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Cloverleaf Level 3 - Advanced/CLADV.  Click here to view course description and agenda.
Cloverleaf: Implementation - Basic Classroom This course introduces the core concepts and tools of the Cloverleaf IDE, including basic navigation and configuration concepts. This training is for version 6.0 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Cloverleaf Level 1 - Basics/CLBASIC Click here to view course description and agenda.
Cloverleaf: Implementation - Intermediate Classroom Cloverleaf Implementation - Intermediate, builds on the data transformation and routing of Level 1 toward building complete interfaces. Students will learn how to connect and transmit data to and from remote systems, build reply schemes, and learn many more details about the Cloverleaf architecture. It is very helpful for students to have studied the TCL programming language before attending. This course is a five-day, instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Cloverleaf Level 2 - Intermediate/CLINTER
Cloverleaf: System Administration Classroom Cloverleaf System Administration provides students hands-on training on Installation, System Maintenance, Automating Maintenance, Alerts, and Upgrading to Basic Security. The course features hands-on practice with Cloverleaf™ commands and utilities, along with tools for automating system management and monitoring tasks. Click here to view course description and agenda.
Cloverleaf: Tool Command Language (TCL) - Introduction Classroom Cloverleaf Tool Command Language - Introduction, is designed for those who have some programming or scripting experience and need a thorough introduction to TCL. Students will learn the basic syntax of TCL and will use TCL with Cloverleaf. TCL Fundamentals is strongly recommended as a preparation for Cloverleaf Level 2 Intermediate Training/Certification. This course is a four-day, instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Cloverleaf TCL Fundamentals/CLTCL
Distribution A+: Accounts Receivable Overview Online 2.00 Accounts Receivable Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Adding Special Order Items to a Sales Order Online Learn what how to add special ordered items on a sales order in Order Entry. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Application Plus v8 Purchasing Training Guide Online v8 Application Plus Purchasing Training Guide Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Application Plus v8 Warehouse Management Training Guide Online v8 Application Plus Warehouse Management Training Guide Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Creating a Duplicate Order Online Learn how to create a duplicate order from a previous sales order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Creating a Master Order Online APlus - Creating a Master Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Creating an Automatic Credit Memo Online See how you can create a return/credit memo from an order that was already invoiced. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Creating an Order from a Master Order Online APlus - Create an Order from a Master Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Customer Specific Order Inquiries Online Learn the different options to inquire on an order or orders for a specific customer Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Deleting Orders Online APlus - Deleting Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Entering a Simple Order Online APlus- Entering a Simple Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Entering Items from History Online Learn how to enter sales orders based on the items a particular customer has ordered in the past. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Entering Items from History List Online Learn how to enter items from the History List screen within OEMAIN opt 1. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Entering One-Time Comments on a Sales Order Online Learn the difference between 'order' and 'line' comments and how to add them on a sales order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Adding an Item - Workshop Online Learn the basics to adding an item in Application Plus. You will enter an item master record, item balance, vendor item, upc number and customer cross reference number. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Adding an Item Demonstration Online An Item is added in Application Plus. View the five basic steps of item setup which include: Setting up the Item Master Setting up the Item Balance Setting up the Vendor Item File Setting up UPC codes Setting up Customer/Item Cross Reference Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Adding an Item Overview Online Attend an Overview of Adding an Item in A+ Software. Basic and required fields will be discussed as well as a general overview of typical steps to add an item. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI AP Life Cycle Overview Online Learn the average life cycle process of an invoice within Accounts Payable. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Apply Cash Using Limits Online 2.04 A+ GUI Apply Cash Using Limits Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Apply Cash Using Payment Codes Online 2.02 A+ GUI Apply Cash Using Payment Codes Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI AR Quick Pay Online 2.11 A+ GUI AR Quick Pay Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Auto Apply Online 2.03 A+ GUI Auto Apply Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Cash & Adjustment Entry and Edit Online 2.01 A+ GUI Cash & Adjustment Entry and Edit Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Cash & Adjustment Post Online 2.10 A+ GUI Cash & Adjustment Post Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Check Edit List Online 3.13 A+ GUI Check Edit List Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Create a Receiver in a Non-Warehouse Management Environment Online This course will go through the steps of creating a receiver, including: -Adding items to a receiver -Changing quantities in a Receiver -Approving items on a receiver -Using inquiry mode from within a receiver -Adding a receipt comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Create an Automatic Return Online 8.02 A+GUI Create an Automatic Return Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Creating a Req/PO From Suggested Orders Online Watch a Demonstration of creating a Requisition/PO from a Suggested Order. This course builds on the suggested order report you created and maintained in exercises 2.01 & 2.02. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Creating a Req/PO From Suggested Orders - Workshop Online Practice what you saw in the demonstration course. -Create a requisition from Suggested Orders -Maintain a Requisition -Turn that Requisition into a PO -View the requisition in the Spool File Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Creating the Warehouse Transfer PO Online Learn the components of creating the warehouse transfer po. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Deposit for an Order Online 2.07 A+ GUI Deposit for an Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Editing a Voucher Group Online Learn the screens and options when you edit a voucher group in Application Plus Accounts Payable. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI End Cash Receipts Goup/Edit List Online 2.09 A+ GUI End Cash Receipts Goup/Edit List Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering a Credit Card Order Online 4.06 A+GUI Entering a Credit Card Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering a Master Order Online 11.01 A+ GUI Entering a Master Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering an Order Online Learn the basics to enter in an order in Application Plus Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering an Order - Comments Charges & Credit Info Online This course will cover comments, charges and credit information: „X Customer Service Comments Screen (re-occurring comments) „X Review Customer Credit Information „X Second Header Screen „X Special Charges „X Line/Order Comments (one-time comments) „X Line Item indicator „X Order on Credit Hold Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering an Order - Comments Charges & Credit Info - Workshop Online Learn about entering an order with special charges, one-time and re-occurring comments, and reviewing the customer credit information screen. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Entering an Order - Workshop Online Practice entering in an order in Application Plus. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Inquiring on an Invoice Online Inquire on an invoice for Joe's Janitorial. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Item Searches/Entering in a Quote Online Learn how to search for a customer's ship to and search for an item while in Order Entry. Also learn how to store an item as a quote. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Item Searches/Entering in a Quote - Workshop Online Practice one of the ways of entering in a quote. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Maintaining Suggested Orders Online This is step two in using the suggested orders report with Application Plus. Follow along with the instructor as she goes through maintaining a suggested order run. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Maintaining Suggested Orders - Workshop Online Practice Maintaining a Suggested Order that you saw the instructor demonstrate in exercise 2.02. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Master Order Overview Online 11.00 A+GUI Master Order Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Non-sufficient Funds Check Online 2.05 A+ GUI Non-sufficient Funds Check Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Online Viewing of Vouchers in an Unposted Group Online Learn how to view vouchers in an un-posted group. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Order Minimum Hold Online Learn about Order Minimum Hold Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Overview on Using Receivers in a Non-Warehouse Management Environment Online An overview or Receivers and the Receiver Process will be discussed relative to a non-warehouse management environment. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Payment Selection List Online 3.12 A+GUI Payment Selection List Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Payment Selection Maintenance Online This course is a continuation of course 3.09 where a payment selection group was created. Learn how to: -Change Payment Amounts -Remove vouchers from this particular payment group -Add remittance advice Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Payment Selection Process Online 3.09 A+GUI Payment Selection Process Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Pick List Status Inquiry Online Learn about the Pick List Status Inquiry and the following functions: -Reprinting Pick Tickets -Clearing Pick Tickets Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Posting a Voucher Group Online Learn about posting a voucher group. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Print Checks Online 3.14 A+ GUI Print Checks Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Printing Invoices Online 7.01 A+GUI Printing Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Purchasing Warehouse Option Online Learn about the menu XAFILE Purchasing Warehouse Options. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Receipt Validation Online A inventory invoice will be validated against a prior receipt. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Receiving the Warehouse Transfer (Receiving Warehouse) Online Learn about receiving the warehouse transfer purchase order and viewing IA Item Inquiry transaction codes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Record Check Numbers Online 3.15 A+GUI Record Check Numbers Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Releasing Exercise 3.01's Order Off of 'SP' Hold Online 6.01(A) A+GUI Releasing Exercise 3.01's order off of 'SP' Hold Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Reviewing GL Transactions Online Review GL Transactions that were created from our transfer from warehouse 1 to warehouse 3. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Running the Suggested Orders Report Online This is the first step in creating a suggested order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Running the Suggested Orders Report - Workshop Online Archived 7-16-14 - Practice what you learned from the 2.01 Demonstration on creating a suggested order report. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Setting up a Customer Online Learn how to enter in a customer within Application Plus. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Setting up a Customer - Workshop Online Practice adding a customer and ship to within Application Plus. This course is a complement to the Base Data Series Presentation Course on Adding a Customer. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Setting up a Vendor Online Learn about adding a vendor within Application Plus. Required fields will be discussed in both the Purchasing and Accounts Payable arenas. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Setting up a Vendor - Workshop Online Practice adding a vendor in Application Plus v8 GUI. You will view an existing vendor and add a new vendor from scratch. This course is a complement to the Base Data Series Presentation course. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Ship Confirming Individual Orders Online 6.01(C) A+GUI Ship Confirming Individual Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Shipping the Warehouse Transfer (Sending Warehouse) Online Learn about printing the warehouse transfer pick ticket, shipping the product and invoicing the warehouse transfer purchase order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Special Orders and Ordering from History Online A special order is added to a sales order, and other items the customer purchased before are added from the History List. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Unapplied Cash Online 2.06 A+ GUI Unapplied Cash Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Vouchering an Expense Invoice - Example 2 Online This is the second example of entering an invoice for an non-inventory vendor. This exercise contains: -multiple expense accounts -searching for an account -Using masks during searching -control totals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Vouchering an Expense Invoice - Example 2 Workshop Online Practice what you learned in the 3.01 second example exercise. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Vouching an Expense Invoice Online Learn how to enter in a voucher for a non-inventory vendor. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Vouching an Expense Invoice - Workshop Online Practice what you learned in the demonstration of entering in an Expense Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Warehouse Customer Setup Online Learn about setting up a warehouse transfer company warehouse customer. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Warehouse Transfer High Level Overview Online Learn the basic steps and process flow in creating a warehouse transfer in Application Plus using the warehouse transfer functionality. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Warehouse Vendor Setup Online Learn about how to add a warehouse transfer vendor. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: GUI Wxfer Cost Relationships Online Learn different ways to set unique sell prices to different warehouse-transfer warehouses within your organization. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Looking at Carrier Inquiry Online Learn about the Carrier Inquiry Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Master Order Overview Online APlus - Master Order Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Order Activity Inquiry Online Learn how to access the Order Activity Screen and see all the wonderful information captured for your records. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Order Snapshot Inquiry Online Learn about the inquiry that will give you a summary of all your open orders in APLUS plus a few other great features. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing a Batch of Invoices Online APlus - Printing a Group of Invoices (Batch Invoicing) Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing a Group of Pick Tickets Online Learn how to print a batch of pick tickets. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing an Individual Invoice Online Learn how to print an individual invoice. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing an Individual Pick Ticket Online Learn how to print an individual pick ticket for a sales order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing Returns (Credit Memos) Online APlus - Printing Returns (Credit Memos) Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Printing RGA Slips Online Learn how to print Return Goods Authorization(RGA) Slips Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Processing a Manual Return Online APlus - Processing a Manual Return Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Processing Returns Online APlus - Processing Returns Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Releasing Returns Online APlus - Releasing Returns Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for a Customer within Application Plus Online Review existing search capabilities and learn new search criteria at v7 of Application Plus. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for an Item within Application Plus Online Learn how to search for items using item number, item description and item class/subclass Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for an Order by Customer Purchase Order Online Learn the different places in Aplus where you can search for an order by your customer's purchase order number. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for an Order by Order Number Online APlus - Searching for an Order by Order Number Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for Customer on OE Start Screen Online APlus - Searching for a Customer on the OE Start Screen Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Searching for Orders by Item Online Learn how to look for open or invoiced orders by item. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Setting Up Re-occurring Sales Order Comments by Customer Online APlus - Setting up Re-occurring sales order comments by customer Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Ship Confirming an Order Online Learn how to Ship Confirm an Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using Item Search to Add Items to a Sales Order Online Learn how to utilize the search option for items within a sales orders and select them for addition on your sales order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using Special Charges Online Learn about special charges and how to enter them on a sales order. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using the Mark-Un Mark Feature Online Learn how to use the mark/un-mark feature that is available through several menu options within Application Plus. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using the Open Order Inquiry (Option 12) Online Learn about using the filter criteria to limit and/or easily view a particular order or group of orders. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using the Pick List Status Inquiry Online Learn how to look up pick lists that have been printed and reprint all or some of those pick lists. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Using the Question Mark Feature within Application Plus Online Learn what the question mark feature is and how to use it. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution A+: Working with Customer Service Comments Online APlus - Customer Service Comments Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: v.10.0.1 Entering a Price Correction Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how Enter a Pricing Correction. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adding a Customer Record 1 Online Adding a Customer Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adding a Customer Record 2 Online Adding a Customer Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adding a Vendor Record Online Adding a Vendor Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adjusting or Correcting NS DO Transactions Online Adjusting or Correcting NS DO Transactions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adjusting Sales Tax on a Correction Order Online Adjusting Sales Tax on a Correction Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Adjusting Sales Taxes on a Correction Online Adjusting Sales Taxes on a Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - AP 101 Slides Online AP 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - AP 201 Slides Online AP 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - AP and GL Impacts Online APEI - AP and GL Impacts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - APEGU Update and Reporting Online APEI - APEGU Update and Reporting Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Big Picture Overview Online APEI - Big Picture Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Correcting and Reconciling Invoices Online APEI - Correcting and Reconciling Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Invoice Processing Workflow Online APEI - Invoice Processing Workflow Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Setups and Operator Security Online APEI - Setups and Operator Security Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Update and Reconciliation Online APEI - Update and Reconciliation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - APEI - Window Overviews Online APEI - Window Overviews Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying a Single Payment to Multiple Invoices 1 Online Applying a Single Payment to Multiple Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying a Single Payment to Multiple Invoices 2 Online Applying a Single Payment to Multiple Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying a Split Check Payment 1 Online Applying a Split Check Payment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying a Split Check Payment 2 Online Applying a Split Check Payment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Credits to Customer Invoices 1 Online Applying Credits to Customer Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Credits to Customer Invoices 2 Online Applying Credits to Customer Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Miscellaneous Credits 1 Online Applying Miscellaneous Credits Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Miscellaneous Credits 2 Online Applying Miscellaneous Credits Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Payment to Regular Invoices 1 Online Applying Payment to Regular Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Applying Payment to Regular Invoices 2 Online Applying Payment to Regular Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - AR 101 Slides Online AR 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - AR 201 Slides Online AR 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Changing the Hold Status of a Sales Order 1 Online Changing the Hold Status of a Sales order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Changing the Hold Status of a Sales Order 2 Online Changing the Hold Status of a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Comparing Vendor Balances 1 Online Comparing Vendor Balances Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Comparing Vendor Balances 2 Online Comparing Vendor Balances Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Controller 101 Slides Online Controller 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Controller 201 Slides Online Controller 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Converting a COD Invoice 1 Online Converting a COD Invoice Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Converting a COD Invoice 2 Online Converting a COD Invoice Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Costing Purchase Orders 1 Online Costing a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Costing Purchase Orders 2 Online Costing Purchase Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Correction Order 1 Online Entering a Correction Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Correction Order 2 Online Entering a Correction Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Vendor 1 Online Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Vendor Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Vendor 2 Online Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Vendor Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Price Correction Online Entering a Price Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Vendor Invoice 1 Online Entering a Vendor Invoice Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering a Vendor Invoice 2 Online Entering a Vendor Invoice Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions 1 Online Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions 2 Online Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Identifying Suspense Accounts 1 Online Identifying Suspense Accounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Identifying Suspense Accounts 2 Online Identifying Suspense Accounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Paying Invoices Automatically 1 Online Paying Invoices Automatically Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Paying Invoices Automatically 2 Online Paying Invoices Automatically Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Processing Invoices 1 Online Processing Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Processing Invoices 2 Online Processing Invoices Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Removing Suspense Account Postings 1 Online Removing Suspense Account Postings Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Removing Suspense Account Postings 2 Online Removing Suspense Account Postings Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Setting Up a Tax Master Record 1 Online Setting Up a Tax Master Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Setting Up a Tax Master Record 2 Online Setting Up a Tax Master Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Setting Up Account Numbers Online Setting Up Account Numbers Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Writing Off an Underpayment 1 Online Writing Off an Underpayment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Writing Off an Underpayment 2 Online Writing Off an Underpayment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Writing Off Sales Tax 1 Online Writing Off Sales Tax Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Accounting Training Guide - Writing Off Sales Tax 2 Online Writing Off Sales Tax Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Additional Data-Flow Discussion and Review 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Additional Data-Flow Discussion and Review 2 Online This is Session 4 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Additional Information - Progress After-Imaging Online This is an Additional Information Session for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Additional Information - Progress PROBKUP Utility Online This is an Additional Information Session for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Additional Information - Progress PROMON Utility Online This is an Additional Information Session for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Alternate Vendors and Vendor Price Records Online This course discusses SX.enterprise pricing concepts as they relate to alternate vendors and alternate vendor price records. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP101 - Overview Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post both expense and trade invoices upon completing this course.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Payable Transaction Entry
  • Expense and Trade invoices
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP101 - Posting Expense and Trade Invoices Classroom The AP101 class demonstrates how to post both expense and trade invoices in SX.enterprise.
Distribution SX.e: AP101 - Practice Lab - Costing a Purchase Order Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post both expense and trade invoices upon completing this course.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Payable Transaction Entry
  • Expense and Trade invoices
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP101 - Practice Lab - Entering a Debit Memo for a Vendor Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post both expense and trade invoices upon completing this course.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Payable Transaction Entry
  • Expense and Trade invoices
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP201 - Overview Online What to Expect
  • You will understand the payment process as well as how to void a check.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Payable Cash Requirements
  • Edit Payment Selection
  • Pay Invoices Due
  • Check Printing
  • Check Reconciliation Check Register
  • Check Reconciliation Entry Transaction to Void a Check
  • Accounts Payable 1099 Print
  • Accounts Payable Year-end
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP201 - Practice Lab - Manually Paying an Existing Invoice Online What to Expect
  • You will understand the payment process as well as how to void a check.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Payable Cash Requirements
  • Edit Payment Selection
  • Pay Invoices Due
  • Check Printing
  • Check Reconciliation Check Register
  • Check Reconciliation Entry Transaction to Void a Check
  • Accounts Payable 1099 Print
  • Accounts Payable Year-end
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AP201 - Processing Vendor Payment and Voiding Checks Classroom The AP201 class demonstrates the vendor payment process (processing a check run) as well as how to void a check.
Distribution SX.e: APEI APEGU Update and Reporting Online This final session in the APEI Basics series will be addressing the APEGU Update and Reporting functionalities. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Big Picture Online APEI Big Picture is the FIRST class in the basic AP Invoice Processing series. This class is designed to help the learner understand how and where APEI fits into the Big Picture flow. Navigation and a high level overview of APEI will be demonstrated in this class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Corrections and Reconciliation Online In this session we are going to discuss correcting and reconciling invoices in APEI. After today’s session, you should be able to find invoices requiring correcting and determine what type of reconciliation processes SX.enterprise offers prior to the FINAL update that impacts the general ledger. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Impacts to AP and General Ledger Online Session #5 in the APEI Basics series addresses the impacts to Accounts Payable and the General Ledger during receiving and updating in the AP Invoice Processing center. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Setups and Operator Security Online This class cover APEI setups in administrator options (ao), operator security (SASO), and Accounts Payable Setup Vendor (APSV). After having reviewed this class, you'll be ready to complete setups in your test environments as well as ready to learn how to enter invoices in the AP Invoice Processing center during Session #3. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Update and Reconciliation Online Session #4 in the APEI basic series covers the update and reconciliation process. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: APEI Window Overview Online This class will help you learn about the different windows involved in the AP Invoice Processing center. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Application Integrator 5.0 Trade Partner Profile Setup Online Application Integrator 5.0 Trade Partner Profile Setup: PURPOSE: Set up trading partner profiles in Application Integrator Trade Guide to prepare for translation of documents with trading partners. ASSUMPTIONS: Knowledge of accessing Application Integrator Trade Guide. PRE-REQUISITES: Basic knowledge of EDI, X12 enveloping recommended. OBJECTIVE: Upon completion of this course, you will be able to setup trading partners for translation of X12 documents, inbound and outbound. DOCUMENTATION: Setting up Quick Guide to Trade Partner Profile Setup, including a specification for X12 enveloping. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Applying Customer Payment to an Invoice Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply Customer Payment to AR Invoice. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Common Business Situations with Posting Cash Receipts Classroom The AR series is a two-part series. The AR101 class steps a new user through a series of our most common business situations encountered during cash receipts posting within SX.e.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Overview Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Practice Lab - Applying a Payment to Regular Invoices Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Practice Lab - Applying a Single Payment to Multiple Invoices Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Practice Lab - Applying a Split Check Payment Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Practice Lab - Applying Payments to COD Invoices Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR101 - Practice Lab - Posting Miscellaneous Cash Online What to Expect
  • You will be able to post all types of customer payments and understand the impact on the customer history file.
Areas Covered
  • Accounts Receivable Cash Receipts Entry
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR201 - Handling Corrections and Month-End Procedures Classroom The AR201 class will help you understand the process to handle all forms of corrections that must impact the customers file/statement as well as month-end procedures.
Distribution SX.e: AR201 - Overview Online AR 201 WebEx Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: AR201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Price Correction Online Practice Lab: Entering a Price Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Basic Business - Margins Turns and GMROI Online Entry level basic business concepts for new inventory managers or those that don't have a financial background. Includes an explanation of SGM, Turns, Turn and Earn, Gross Margin Return on Investment and other basic business terms and concept. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Basic Business - Ordering Controls for Inventory Mgrs Online This class is an introduction to ordering controls used in inventory management. It discusses the definition and concepts behind: Line Point, Order Point, Lead Time, Review Cycle, Average Usage calculation methods, Safety Stock, Order Quantity calculation methods, EOQ and many more terms. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Basic Business - Safety Stock Online This is a basic business class for Inventory Managers that discusses the terminology, concepts and methods for determining Safety Stock levels Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Basic Business for Inv Mgrs - Understanding EOQ Online This class focuses in on Economic Order Quantity discussing the following: Why is EOQ useful When to use EOQ The mathematics of EOQ The components of EOQ and how they interact The SXe setup that effect EOQ Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations - Overview Online Branch Ops WebEx Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations – Practice Lab - Changing a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations - Practice Lab - Handling Warehouse Transfer Exceptions Online Practice Lab: Handling Warehouse Transfer Exceptions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations – Practice Lab - Printing a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations - Practice Lab - Receiving a Warehouse Transfer Online Practice Lab: Receiving a Warehouse Transfer Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations - Practice Lab - Shipping Warehouse Transfers Online Practice Lab: Shipping Warehouse Transfers Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Operations - Shipping and Receiving Overview Classroom You will be able to ship both customer orders and internal warehouse transfers. You will also be able to receive internal warehouse transfers as well as vendor purchase orders.
The following SX.e functionalities will be covered:
Order Entry Shipping Feedback
Warehouse Transfer Shipping
Purchase Order Receiving
Warehouse Transfer Receiving
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Assigning Serial Numbers to Orders During Shipping 1 Online Assigning Serial Numbers to Orders During Shipping Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Assigning Serial Numbers to Orders During Shipping 2 Online Assigning Serial Numbers to Orders During Shipping Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Branch Operations Slides Online Branch Operations Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Correcting a Wrong Product Receipt 1 Online Correcting a Wrong Product Receipt Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Correcting a Wrong Product Receipt 2 Online Correcting a Wrong Product Receipt Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Receiving a Purchase Order 1 Online Receiving a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Receiving a Purchase Order 2 Online Receiving a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Shipping an Order 1 Online Shipping an Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Shipping an Order 2 Online Shipping Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Branch Ops Training Guide - Warehouse Transfer Life Cycle Online Warehouse Transfer Life Cycle Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Brio Beginning Online This course is designed as an initial look into the Hyperion-Brio Reporting Tool and how to use it. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Brio Training Guide - Beginning Brio Exercise 1 Online Beginning Brio Exercise 1 Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Brio Training Guide - Beginning Brio Exercise 2 Online Beginning Brio Exercise 2 Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Brio Training Guide - Beginning Brio Exercise 3 Online Beginning Brio Exercise 3 Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Brio Training Guide - Beginning Brio Exercise 4 Online Beginning Brio Exercise 4 Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Building an SX.e Training Company - Initial System Setups - Part 1 Classroom This class is first in a five-part series that will be addressing SX.enterprise (SX.e) setups, OE, PO and WT process flows, as well as Handling Shipping and Receiving Exceptions. If you are the System Administrator for your company or simply new to SX.e, learning the system from the inside out can be done - but you have to start somewhere. What better place to start than by building your own training company! Because so many setups within SX.e depend on other system setups as a pre-requisite, this class follows the "Building a Training Company" document. Join us for this five-part series to first learn how to proceed with setups within SX.e and then get to know three of the primary SX.e modules and handling exceptions to those flow processes. To get the most from this series, it would be best to have access to your own SX.e company during or immediately following class. However, if you are just coming to class to watch the application setup process and the process flows - there is still a lot you can learn!
Distribution SX.e: Building an SX.e Training Company - Order Entry Process Flow - Part 3 Classroom Please Note: You must complete Distribution SX.e: Building an SX.e Training Company - Initial System Setups - Part 1 prior to attending this course.
Order Entry Process Flow is the third class in this five-part series. Once all setups have been completed for your training company, you will be ready to process stock orders through the Order Entry (OE) module, printing picking documents, as well as shipping and invoicing orders. Posting a customer payment in the Accounts Receivable (AR) cash receipts module completes the OE flow process for this class. This class covers all stages of a stock order as it moves through the system.
Distribution SX.e: Building an SX.e Training Company - Purchase Order Process Flow - Part 4 Classroom Fourth in the series of Building a Training Company is understanding how an order placed in the Purchase Order (PO) module flows through the system from manual or automatic entry of a PO, to receipt of material, to costing the PO in the Accounts Payable (AP) module. This class covers all stages of the purchase order as it moves through the system. Note: MUST COMPLETE CLASS #3 PRIOR TO ATTENDING THIS CLASS
Distribution SX.e: Buyer 101 Online Buyer 101 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer 101 - Buyers Control Center Classroom This class focuses on how to use the Buyer's Control Center. At the completion you will be able to create the buyers reports, modify them as necessary and merge them into the appropriate purchasing documents.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer 201 Online Buyer 201 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer 201 - Understanding SX.e Ordering Controls Classroom This class discusses the ordering controls that are used to produce the Buyer's Control Center reports. There is detailed discussion of order point, line point, safety stock, review cycle, lead-time, class, min/max, EOQ, usage methods, etc.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer 301 Online Buyer 301 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Accepting and Merging a PO RRAR Report 1 Online Accepting and Merging a PO RRAR Report Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Accepting and Merging a PO RRAR Report 2 Online Accepting and Merging a PO RRAR Report Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding a New Product Line 1 Online Adding a New Product Line Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding a New Product Line 2 Online Adding a New Product Line Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding a New Product Record 1 Online Adding a New Product Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding a New Product Record 2 Online Adding a New Product Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding a Vendor Record Online Adding a Vendor Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Action Report 1 Online Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Action Report Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Action Report 2 Online Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Action Report Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Analyzing Usage Online Analyzing Usage Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Basic Business - Advanced EOQ Online Basic Business - Advanced EOQ Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Basic Business - Margins and Turns Online Basic Business - Margins and Turns Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Basic Business - Ordering Controls Online Basic Business - Ordering Controls Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Basic Business - Safety Stock Online Basic Business - Safety Stock Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Buyer 101 Slides Online Buyer 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Buyer 201 Slides Online Buyer 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Buyer 301 Online Buyer 301 Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Canceling a Purchase Order 1 Online Canceling a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Canceling a Purchase Order 2 Online Canceling a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Changing a Purchase Order 1 Online Changing a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Changing a Purchase Order 2 Online Changing a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Consolidating PO RRAR Reports 1 Online Consolidating PO RRAR Reports Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Consolidating PO RRAR Reports 2 Online Consolidating PO RRAR Reports Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Copying a Purchase Order 1 Online Copying a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Copying a Purchase Order 2 Online Copying a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Creating a Purchase Order 1 Online Creating a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Creating a Purchase Order 2 Online Creating a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Entering an RM Purchase Order 1 Online Entering an RM Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Entering an RM Purchase Order 2 Online Entering an RM Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Manually Tying an Order to a PO 1 Online Manually Tying an Order to a PO Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Manually Tying an Order to a PO 2 Online Manually Tying an Order to a PO Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Printing a Purchase Order 1 Online Printing a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Printing a Purchase Order 2 Online Printing a Purchase Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Updating Ordering Controls 1 Online Updating Ordering Controls Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Updating Ordering Controls 2 Online Updating Ordering Controls Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Buyer Training Guide - Using Quick Receive to Receive Purchase Online Using Quick Receive to Receive Purchase Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CAM Training Guide - Contact & Activity Manager (CAM) Slides Online CAM Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Changing Pricing and Costs Online This is a course specifically dedicated to changing the pricing and costs for items within the SX.enterprise application. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Changing Existing Orders Online Character SX.e - Changing Existing Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Sales Order Online Character SX.e - Entering a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order Online Character SX.e - Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document Online Character SX.e - Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Canceling a Sales Order Online Character SX.e - Canceling a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Canceling a Sales Order Line Online Character SX.e - Canceling a Sales Order Line Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Converting a Quote to a Pricing Record Online Character SX.e - Converting a Quote to a Pricing Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Copying a Quote to a Regular Stock Order Online Character SX.e - Copying a Quote to a Regular Stock Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Copying Sales Order Online Character SX.e - Copying Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Counter Sale Online Character SX.e - Entering a Counter Sale Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Direct Order Online Character SX.e - Entering a Direct Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Nonstock Product Online Character SX.e - Entering a Nonstock Product Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Price Correction Online Character SX.e - Entering a Price Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Quote Order Online Character SX.e - Entering a Quote Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Return Merchandise Online Character SX.e - Entering a Return Merchandise Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering a Return on a CS or SO Online Character SX.e - Entering a Return on a CS or SO Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Entering Drop Ship Line Items Online Character SX.e - Entering Drop Ship Line Items Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Order Entry Selling from an Alternate Warehouse Online Character SX.e - Order Entry Selling from an Alternate Warehouse Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Printing Documents on Demand Online Character SX.e - Printing Documents on Demand Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Character SX.e Training Guide - Tendering a Counter Sale Online Character SX.e - Tendering a Counter Sale Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CHUI to GUI CSR Migration Online This course covers the normal OE flow and how this flow operates within the graphical product. This course assumes you currently use the character version and thus will be discussing differences NOT the actual processes. SX.e CHUI to GUI Navigation is a prerequisite to this course. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Contact & Activity Manager Online CAM WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Controller 101 Online Controller 101 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Controller 101 - Practice Lab - Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions Online Practice Lab: Entering and Maintaining GL Transactions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Controller 201 Online Controller 201 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Accessing a Comment Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Accessing a Note Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Answering Customer Questions When Knowing the Order Number Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Answering Customer Questions When Not Knowing the Order Number Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Canceling a Stock Order Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Changing a Stock Order Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Creating a Comment Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Entering a Stock Order Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Practice Lab - Entering an Order-As-Needed Product Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 1 - Introduction Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 2 - Sales Area Overview Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 3 - Entering a Stock Order Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 4 - Notes and Comments Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 5 - The Views Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 6 - Unusual Circumstances Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 101 - Session 7 - Non-stocks and Special Orders Online This course reviews the basics of the sales process in SX.enterprise. The focus of this course is on entering and maintaining sales orders, getting familiar with the order entry area and reviewing the special features of Order Entry such as Kits, Cross-reference, Catalog items, shopping list, etc. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE Online Practice Lab: Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Counter Sale Online Practice Lab: Entering a Counter Sale Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Direct Order Online Practice Lab: Entering a Direct Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Direct Order Line Item Online Practice Lab: Entering a Direct Order Line Item Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Quote Order Online Practice Lab: Entering a Quote Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Entering a Return for a Counter Sale or Stock Order Online Practice Lab: Entering a Return for a Counter Sale or Stock Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Practice Lab - Tendering a CS in Full Online Practice Lab: Tendering a CS in Full Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 1 - Introduction Online CSR201 Session 1 Introduction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 2 - Quote Orders Online CSR201 Session 2 Quote Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 3 - Future Orders Online CSR201 Session 3 Future Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 4 - Standing Orders Online CSR201 Session 4 Standing Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 5 - Blanket Orders Online CSR201 Session 5 Blanket Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 6 - Return Merchandise Orders Online CSR201 Session 6 Return Merchandise Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 7 - Direct Orders Online CSR201 Session 7 Direct Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR 201 - Session 8 - Counter Sales Online CSR201 Session 8 Counter Sales Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE 1 Online Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE 2 Online Automatically Tying an Order to a Source Document in OE Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Canceling a Sales Order Line 1 Online Canceling a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Canceling a Sales Order Line 2 Online Canceling a Sales Order Line Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Changing Existing Orders 1 Online Changing Existing Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Changing Existing Orders 2 Online Changing Existing Orders Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Converting a Quote to a Pricing Record Online Converting a Quote to a Pricing Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Copying a Quote to a Regular Stock Order 1 Online Copying a Quote Order to a Regular Stock Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Copying a Quote to a Regular Stock Order 2 Online Copying a Quote to a Regular Stock Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Copying a Sales Order 1 Online Copying a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Copying a Sales Order 2 Online Copying a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - CSR 101 Slides Online CSR 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - CSR 201 Slides Online CSR 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Correction Order Online Entering a Correction Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Counter Sale 1 Online Entering a Counter Sale Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Counter Sale 2 Online Entering a Counter Sale Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Direct Order 1 Online Entering a Direct Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Direct Order 2 Online Entering a Direct Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Nonstock Product Online Entering a Nonstock Product Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Price Correction 1 Online Entering a Price Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Price Correction 2 Online Entering a Price Correction Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Quote Order 1 Online Entering a Quote Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Quote Order 2 Online Entering a Quote Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Return Merchandise Sales Order 1 Online Entering a Return Merchandise Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Return Merchandise Sales Order 2 Online Entering a Return Merchandise Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Return on a CS or SO 1 Online Entering a Return on a CS or SO Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Return on a CS or SO 2 Online Entering a Return on a CS or SO Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Stock Order 1 Online Entering a Stock Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering a Stock Order 2 Online Entering a Stock Order PDF Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order 1 Online Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order 2 Online Entering Add-on Charges to a Sales Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering Drop Ship Line Items 1 Online Entering Drop Ship Line Items Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Entering Drop Ship Line Items 2 Online Entering Drop Ship Line Items Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Faxing Documents to Customers 1 Online Faxing Documents to Customers Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Faxing Documents to Customers 2 Online Faxing Documents to Customers Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Order Entry Excel Import Slides Online Order Entry Excel Import Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Order Entry Selling From an Alternate Warehouse Online Order Entry Selling From an Alternate Warehouse Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Printing Documents on Demand 1 Online Printing Documents on Demand Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Printing Documents on Demand 2 Online Printing Documents on Demand Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Printing Pick Tickets in Batch Mode 1 Online Printing Pick Tickets in Batch Mode Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Printing Pick Tickets in Batch Mode 2 Online Printing Pick Tickets in Batch Mode Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Tendering a Counter (Collected) Sale in Full 1 Online Tendering a Counter (Collected) Sale in Full Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR Training Guide - Tendering a Counter (Collected) Sale in Full 2 Online Tendering a Counter Sale in Full Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: CSR101 - Basic Order Entry Overview Classroom This class covers basic use of the order entry functionality. The class focuses on entering and maintaining stock orders, adding notes and comments to orders, the various screens in the order entry area and unusual circumstances such as serial numbers, substitutes, kits, non-stocks, special orders, etc.
Distribution SX.e: CSR201 - Identifying and Entering Order Types Classroom This class deals with the various order types, quotes, future orders, standing orders, blanket orders, return merchandise orders, direct orders, and counter sales. The focus is on when to use each of the order types and how to enter them.
Distribution SX.e: Database Files and Crash Recovery 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Database Files and Crash Recovery 2 Online This is Session 8 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Database Tuning Walkthrough Online As a result of viewing this series of presentations, you will be able to: * Identify resources to consider when tuning your system. * Utilize performance tools. * Follow the “best practices” performance tuning workflow outlined by Infor. This is a technical session, and in order to get the most from it, you should have a basic understanding of the following: * System monitoring tools and resources * Progress database engine Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Data-Flow Discussion - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Data-flow Discussion - 2 Online This is Session 3 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Disaster Planning and Recovery Online This is an Additional Information Session for the System Administrator Series, discussing the general points of Disaster Planning and Recovery for your system. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Disconnecting Users - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Disconnecting Users - 2 Online This is Session 7 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Dump and Load - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Dump and Load - 2 Online This is Session 18 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Expectations Infor and Progress Relationships Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Accessing a Comment 1 Online Accessing a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Accessing a Comment 2 Online Accessing a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Accessing a Note 1 Online Accessing a Note Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Accessing a Note 2 Online Accessing a Note Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Creating a Comment 1 Online Creating a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Creating a Comment 2 Online Creating a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Deleting a Comment 1 Online Deleting a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Deleting a Comment 2 Online Deleting a Comment Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Deleting a Note 1 Online Deleting a Note Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Deleting a Note 2 Online Deleting a Note Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Logging in to SX.enterprise 1 Online Logging in to SX.enterprise Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: General Training Guide - Logging in to SX.enterprise 2 Online Logging in to SX.enterprise Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Grant Howard Distribution Industry Education Session Online Grant Howard presents an introduction and overview of: - Trends and impacts in distribution - User Group opportunities - Paths to better profits longevity and growth Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI Big Picture Classroom Come to this class before attending other SX.e basic courses to learn how to move around within the software. By learning first how to navigate the SX.enterprise software you will be better able to focus on basic SX.e functionality in your other Virtual or Self-paced classes.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Answering Customer Questions When Knowing the Order Number Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Answering Customer Questions When Not Knowing the Order Number Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Applying a Payment to Regular Invoices Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Creating a Purchase Order Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Entering a Stock Order Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Practice Lab - Processing Invoices Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Session 1 - Introduction Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Session 2 - Navigator and SX Acronyms Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Session 3 - Order Entry Workflow Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Session 4 - Purchase Order Entry Workflow Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: GUI The Big Picture - Session 5 - Cool Stuff Online This is the FIRST series of classes ANYONE using SX.enterprise (GUI) should take. This series covers how users navigate within SX.enterprise and the workflow your inventory takes through the system as it is sold and purchased. NOTE: We consider GUI Big Pic a pre-requisite to all other classes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: How To Use Interactive Classes Online ARCHIVED 4/16/14   How To Use Interactive Classes Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Adding a New Product Record Online Adding a New Product Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Adjusting or Correcting Non-Stock/Drop Transactions Online Adjusting or Correcting Non-Stock/Drop transactions Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Adjusting Product Quantity Levels Online Adjusting Product Quantity Levels Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Balancing Non-stock Inventory Accounts Online Balancing Non-stock Inventory Accounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Balancing Stock Inventory Accounts Online Balancing Stock Inventory Accounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Entering Counts 1 Online Entering Counts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Entering Counts 2 Online Entering Counts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - IC 101 Slides Online IC 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Kitting 101 Slides Online Kitting 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: IC Training Guide - Printing Cycle Count Sheets Online Printing Cycle Count Sheets Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Information to Gather Before Logging an Issue Online This is an Additional Information Session for the System Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Installing the Application Integrator 5.0 Control Server Online Application Integrator Version 5.0 Install: PURPOSE: Installation of Application Integrator 5.0 Production environment. Media required for the installation is: * Application Integrator Control Server, version 5.0.16.61 or later * Trade Guide version 5.0.13.16 or later * Asc X12 Standards Plugin version 1.1.8.9 or later, Disc 1 and Disc 2. ASSUMPTIONS: None PRE-REQUISITES: None OBJECTIVE: Upon completion of this course, you will be able to install and configure the Application Integrator Production environment. DOCUMENTATION: Install documentation is available on the media for each component of the software. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Installing the Application Integrator 5.0 Trade Guide and Standards Online Application Integrator Version 5.0 Install: PURPOSE: Installation of Application Integrator 5.0 Production environment. Media required for the installation is: * Application Integrator Control Server, version 5.0.16.61 or later * Trade Guide version 5.0.13.16 or later * Asc X12 Standards Plugin version 1.1.8.9 or later, Disc 1 and Disc 2. ASSUMPTIONS: None PRE-REQUISITES: None OBJECTIVE: Upon completion of this course, you will be able to install and configure the Application Integrator Production environment. DOCUMENTATION: Install documentation is available on the media for each component of the software. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Introduction to PROGRESS Classroom This class is an introductory course and will focus on the fundamentals of PROGRESS programming and learning core tables of the SX Enterprise database. Individuals attending this class should leave with a basic working knowledge of the PROGRESS language, and the ability to produce simple queries. The course will be taught using examples from the SX Enterprise database which serves to reinforce a basic understanding of our database structure.
If you are a KnowledgeZone subscriber of 50+ users, this class is included in your subscription price. Otherwise you will receive a work order for the price of the class.
Distribution SX.e: Inventory Control 101 Online IC 101 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Job Management Online Overview of the SX.enterprise Job Management module and it's uses. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Kitting 101 Online This is a general overview of the Kit Production module within the SX.enterprise application. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Life Cycle of a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: MARC Additional Features Online This is Session 5 of 5 for the MARC - SX.enterprise Scripts Series. This course discusses additional feature functionality incorporated into MARC in accordance with the latest PROGRESS and SX.enterprise releases. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: MARC History Online This is Session 1 of 5 for the MARC - SX.enterprise Scripts Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: MARC Script Generator Online This is Session 4 of 5 for the MARC - SX.enterprise Scripts Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OE - Importing Sales Orders Using Excel Online How to use Excel spreadsheets to create sales orders in Order Entry. - Creating the spreadsheet - Formats required - Testing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OEES - Changing Quantities Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OEES - Freight Charges Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OEES - Serialized Products Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OEES - Split to Backorder Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OEES Windows Shipping and Unshipping Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OpenEdge 10 General Discussion Online This is the What's New in OpenEdge 10? Series. This series of courses is designed update you, by version, regarding the new features and functionality found in the OpenEdge 10 releases through 10.1B. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OpenEdge 10.0B Features and Functionality Online This is the What's New in OpenEdge 10? Series. This series of courses is designed update you, by version, regarding the new features and functionality found in the OpenEdge 10 releases through 10.1B. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OpenEdge 10.1A Features and Functionality Online This is the What's New in OpenEdge 10? Series. This series of courses is designed update you, by version, regarding the new features and functionality found in the OpenEdge 10 releases through 10.1B. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: OpenEdge 10.1B Features and Functionality Online This is the What's New in OpenEdge 10? Series. This series of courses is designed update you, by version, regarding the new features and functionality found in the OpenEdge 10 releases through 10.1B. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Performance Tuning Overview Online As a result of viewing this series of presentations, you will be able to: * Identify resources to consider when tuning your system. * Utilize performance tools. * Follow the “best practices” performance tuning workflow outlined by Infor. This is a technical session, and in order to get the most from it, you should have a basic understanding of the following: * System monitoring tools and resources * Progress database engine Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Adding New Line Items Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Final Update for CHUI and GUI are Same Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Pre-Receiving and Receiving Reports Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Receiving and Assigning Serial Products Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Receiving Damaged Items Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: POEI - Receiving Short Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Report Online Practice Lab: Adding Line Items to a PO Recommended Replenishment Report Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Adding or Modifying Report Schedules Online This interactive lab will allow you to create and modify report schedule types using the report schedules table in SA Setup Table Values. Schedule types allow you to run stored reports at predetermined intervals based on the values you enter in SA Setup Table Values. When you create or maintain a stored report, the Start Type field contains a value from this table (if it was set up with a start type) providing the schedule for subsequent, automatic runs. The schedule types set up here tell Report Manager how to schedule a stored report. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Adjusting or Correcting NS/DO Transactions Online After processing the IC Nonstock/Direct Order Report, use IC Adjust Nonstock/Direct Order to make corrections to the nonstock and Direct Order (DO) records and clear active sets of information. Use this interactive lab to learn how to run the IC Nonstock/Direct Order Report. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Balancing Uncosted Purchase Order Lines Online The GL Balance Purchase Order Report compares the balances in the Uninvoiced Inventory account codes (commonly known as Accrued Accounts Payable) to the total of all purchase orders that have been received, but not fully costed (stage 5 and stage 6). We will review running the report, analyzing a sample, and taking steps to keep the report in balance. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Balancing Uninvoiced Cash Sales and Down Payments Online This interactive lab discusses the GL Balance Order Entry Report. The GL Balance Order Entry Report compares the balances of the OE Uninvoiced Cash Sales and OE Down Payments account codes to Order Entry orders. The Order Entry orders are in Ordered, Picked, or Shipped stages and are cash sales or orders with down payments. Received on account or charge orders are not included in this report. In summary, this report will display any tendering done within Order Entry that has not been billed. This course discusses running the report, analyzing a sample, and taking steps to keep the report in balance. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Balancing Warehouse Transfers Online The GL Balance Transfers Report compares the balances in the Inventory In Transit and Add-ons In Transit accounts, set up in IC Setup Warehouse Descriptions, to the total of all warehouse transfers that are in Stage 3 (Shipped) and/or Stage 4 (Pre-Received). In summary, the report will display transfers that have left one warehouse but not been received by the other warehouse. This course discusses running the report, analyzing a sample, and taking steps to keep the report in balance. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Balancing Year-to-Date and Period-to-Date Online The GL Trial Balance Report is used to review the balances for each account set up in GL Setup Accounts as of the current period or for any period you enter. The balances fall into two categories for a balance sheet or an income statement. At the end of the report, the balance sheet accounts split into asset and liability totals. The income statement accounts split into income and expense totals. It is recommended that the GL Trial Balance be run each day to make sure that debits equal credits within the General Ledger. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Canceling a Purchase Order Online Learn how to cancel a purchase order using this interactive lab. Cancelling a purchase order moves the purchase order to a cancelled stage in SX.e. This allows you to copy it later, access it through inquiries, and print it on reports. If you have any further questions regarding this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Changing the Run Date and Time of a Print Job Online You may need to reschedule certain print jobs that are already assigned to queues. For example, a large report was sent to run during peak system processing time. If that report is not a high priority, you could reschedule it to run when there are fewer demands on system resources. Or you might have copied an existing print job rather than scheduling a new report and now you need to change its run date and time. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Consolidating PO RRARs Online Practice Lab: Consolidating PO RRARs Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Converting a COD Invoice to a Regular Invoice Online SX.e will not allow you to apply miscellaneous credit memos or unapplied cash against COD invoices. You must first convert the COD invoice to a regular invoice using the COD payment option within Cash Receipts Entry. This interactive lab will help you learn how to convert a COD invoice to a regular invoice. If you have any questions regarding the content of this course please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Copying a Purchase Order Online This interactive lab will help you learn how to copy a purchase order in the system. If you have any questions regarding the content of this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Creating a Profile Online This course is designed to introduce a System Administrator to the concepts of profiles and familiarize them with how to set up new operators in SX.enterprise. What to Expect
  • To understand how to set up profiles and new operators.
Areas Covered
  • Operator file types
  • Creating Profiles
  • Setting up and maintaining operators
Audience - New user. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Creating a Purchase Order Online Use this interactive lab to help you learn how to create a purchase order in SX.enterprise. In this lab you will be created a manual purchase orders. Purchase order creation can also be accomplished using the Purchase Order Recommended Replenishment Action Report (PO RRAR) within the Buyer’s Control Center. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Creating a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Deleting a Comment Online This interactive lab will help you learn how to delete a comment on a line item. Remember, a comment is similar to a note, except it relates to a specific line item, not the entire order. A comment displays in the Com field with a “c” next to the line item that has a comment attached to it. To delete a comment, you must access the notes functionality. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Deleting a Note Online This interactive lab will demonstrate how to delete a note. Notes provide an electronic annotation feature that simulates the slips of paper you would normally attach to a document. You can attach notes to any major record, such as a customer or vendor record, a product record, an order in Order Entry or OE Order Inquiry, etc. SX.enterprise indicates notes by highlighting the record they are attached to. Use these instructions to delete a note attached to a record. The ability to delete a note is dependent upon the security of the end user for that particular functionality. If you have any questions regarding the content of this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Deleting a Print Job Online If a print job was created in error, or if you need to clear the job from its print queue for another reason, use the following instructions to delete the job. Do not use the Cut Jobs command from the Edit menu. This command is only for moving print jobs to a different queue. If you highlight a job and select Cut Jobs from the Edit menu, the job remains active in its queue unless you paste it into another queue. Either way, the job will remain active. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - E-mailing Documents Using E-mail Output Online This interactive lab demonstrates how to e-mail SX.e documents using the OE Entry Processing Acknowledgements (OEEPA) functionality. In your live SX.e system, setups must be performed prior to using e-mail output such as the AR–Setup–Customer “eComm” setups. This is done in order to identify that acknowledgements for this customer should be e-mailed and to identify the e-mail address of the designated recipient at the customer site. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering a Correction Online Use this interactive lab to enter a Correction (CR) order type. The AR Specialist uses a CR order type within Order Entry to make pricing and billing adjustments to a customer’s account. The CR order type is used when a customer has been invoiced at the wrong price, or perhaps the wrong customer ship to was billed for the product. Correction order types are used when you do NOT want inventory quantities impacted, but you do want to update the sales manager, customer and General Ledger files. Although, a CR order type is placed in Order Entry, the order begins at the shipped stage. At the point of invoice processing, the Customer’s AR account is credited and Sales and Tax accounts are debited. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering a Credit Memo for a Customer Online In this interactive lab you will enter a credit memo for a customer. Credit memos may be entered for a customer to reduce their balance due. Credit memos must be attached to an active/unpaid invoice transaction. Deductions that would not apply to an active unpaid invoice transaction would be considered a miscellaneous credit. Please refer to the course on miscellaneous credits for more information on this topic. Most Accounts Receivable transactions are generated through Order Entry automatically, such as a return of product. AR Entry Transactions is most commonly used to make adjustments to a customer’s account for non-inventory related credits, such as issuing an advertising rebate, for a purchase, or writing off a customer’s past due balance when multiple invoices are involved. This course will review entry of a customer credit memo within Accounts Receivable. If you have any questions regarding the content of this interactive lab, please send an e-mail to Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering a Customer Invoice Online This interactive lab will help you learn how to enter a customer invoice within your Accounts Receivable module. This invoice will not interface with Order Entry. Use Order Entry to enter customer orders that involve inventory to be shipped and billed. A Non-Sufficient Funds notice from the bank may trigger the use of invoice entry within Accounts Receivable. The invoices that were paid from the NSF check must be collected once again and put back on the customer’s account using this function. Follow these instructions to collect payment once again from an NSF check. If you have any questions regarding the content of this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering a Debit Memo for a Customer Online This course reviews entry of a customer debit memo within Accounts Receivable. Within SX.e, AR Entry Transactions (ARET) is most commonly used to make adjustments to a customer’s account for non-inventory related billings and a debit memo is used to increase the amount of an existing invoice. For example, if you have freight charges to add to the invoice, enter a debit memo for the amount of the freight. The debit memo information is attached to the original billing payment schedule so both billings are collected together. Keep in mind that the debit memo billing shows only within the Accounts Receivable module. If you have any questions regarding this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Customer Online With this interactive lab you will be able to use miscellaneous credits to apply a credit to a customer’s balance without applying it to a specific invoice. Miscellaneous credits reduce the customer’s balance due without attaching to a transaction, where credit memos are applied to an invoice. Most Accounts Receivable transactions are generated through Order Entry automatically. AR Entry Transactions is most commonly used to make adjustments to a customer’s account for non-inventory related promotions or to write off a customer’s past due balance when multiple invoices are involved. For example, you may choose to enter a miscellaneous credit for co-operative advertising within Accounts Receivable instead of through Order Entry. To apply a miscellaneous credit to a specific invoice, you must choose to apply credits in AR Entry Cash Receipts Entry. This course will review entry of a customer miscellaneous credit within Accounts Receivable. If you have any questions about the content of this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Entering an RM Purchase Order Online This interactive lab will help you learn about handling product returns and exchanges in the PO module. Product returns and exchanges are a part of any distribution operation. It is inevitable that you will receive defective or damaged goods. Use these instructions to enter a return purchase order. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Handling Warehouse Transfer Exceptions Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Manually Tying an Order in Purchase Order Online This interactive lab is about how to manually tie a customer’s sales order while in PO Entry Transactions (POET). Order ties are created to link a specific purchase order to a specific line in a customer’s order. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Printing Invoices on Demand Online Demand invoices produced through Order Entry Report Demand Print (OERD) are generally used to send an invoice to the customer before the order is Invoice Processed or simply to reprint an invoice that was lost or damaged during shipping. The term demand invoice is used because it indicates you can print an invoice any time you need one (upon demand). Printing a demand invoice has NO effect on the stage of the order and does not update any Order Entry, Inventory Control, or Accounts Receivable files. Follow along with this interactive lab to print invoice on demand in OERD. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Processing Invoices Online This interactive lab will help you learn how to manually process invoices which is one of the last steps necessary to complete an order. This step creates the Accounts Receivable records that prepare SX.enterprise to accept payment for orders. During OE Entry Processing Invoice Processing, you may also print invoices; however, we recommend that you do not print invoices during nightly invoice processing. Instead, send the invoices to a file and print the invoices the next day when someone is available to ensure the printer does not jam. If you have any questions regarding this interactive lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Receiving a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Setting Up a New Stored Report Online Storing reports, especially lengthy ones, is recommended if several operators share printers because it allows you to coordinate, rather than compete for, printer time. Storing reports also automates report printing when the same information is required on a periodic basis. For example, you must process invoices at the end of each day, so you set up the OE Entry Processing Invoice Processing report to run automatically every day at 5:30 p.m. Use these instructions to set up a stored report. These instructions illustrate how to set up a stored report for a particular function, one at a time. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Setting Up Print Queues Online You use SA Printing Setup Print Queues to create or modify existing print queues. You can also use this function to inactivate print queues by deselecting the Active option. When you set up new queues, be sure to use a name that follows the naming conventions established by your company as well as an appropriate description of the queue. If you have any additional questions regarding the content of this lab, please send us an e-mail at Distribution.LearningSolutions@infor.com. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Shipping a Warehouse Transfer Online Shows how a warehouse transfer moves through the stages from entry, printing and shipping to receiving. Also shows the exception stage. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Practice Lab - Updating the Count Online Practice Lab: Updating the Count Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing - Terms Discount in Pricing Records Online This class describes how the Terms Discount field works in PD Setup Pricing and IC Setup Products. Topics covered are: - What is Terms Discount - What is a line item Terms Discount - Setups used - Demonstration of Terms Discount field Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 101 Online Pricing 101 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 101 - Practice Lab - Choosing a Price Record Type Online Practice Lab: Choosing a Price Record Type Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 101 - Practice Lab - Creating a Net Price Price Record Online Practice Lab: Creating a Net Price Price Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 101 - Practice Lab - Setting Up a Customer Price Type Online Practice Lab: Setting Up a Customer Price Type Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 101 - Understanding and Creating Pricing Records Classroom This class covers the fundamentals of creating pricing records in graphical SX.e.
Topic covered are pricing hierarchy, creating pricing records, pricing setups, pricing functions in OE and mass maintenance of price records.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 201 - Overview Online Pricing 201 WebEx Session Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing 201 - Understanding Rebates Classroom This class deals with understanding rebates.
Class focus is on setting up rebate records, system setups that affect rebates, processing rebates, reconciling rebates and mass maintenance of rebate records.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Alternate Vendors Pricing Online Alternate Vendors Pricing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Choosing a Price Record Type 1 Online Choosing a Price Record Type Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Choosing a Price Record Type 2 Online Choosing a Price Record Type Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Converting a Quote Order to Pricing Record Online Converting a Quote Order to Pricing Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Creating a Level Re-Pricing Record 1 Online Creating a Level Re-Pricing Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Creating a Level Re-Pricing Record 2 Online Creating a Level Re-Pricing Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Creating a Quantity Break Price Record 1 Online Creating a Quantity Break Price Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Creating a Quantity Break Price Record 2 Online Creating a Quantity Break Price Record Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Future Price and Cost Changes Online Future Price and Cost Changes Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Pricing 101 Slides Online Pricing 101 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Pricing 201 Slides Online Pricing 201 Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Special Price Type Discounts Online Special Price Type Discounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Terms Discounts Online Terms Discounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Pricing Training Guide - Whole Order Discounts Online Whole Order Discounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Product Inquiry Overview Online This is an interactive simulation on the demonstrating the Product Inquiry Overview. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress 9.x Architecture and Review 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress 9.x Architecture and Review 2 Online This is Session 6 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Database Concepts - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Database Concepts - 2 Online This is Session 2 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - BI File - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - BI File - 2 Online This is Session 12 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - Client - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - Client - 2 Online This is Session 11 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - Database Broker - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Progress Parameter Discussion - Database Broker - 2 Online This is Session 10 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Record Management - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Record Management - 2 Online This is Session 17 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Report Manager, Report Scheduler, Security and Profiles Online This class is an overview from the Character to Graphical SX.enterprise class for System Administrators. Topics discussed in this recording include differences between the character and graphical versions of SX.enterprise, specifically in: * Profiles * Security * Report Manager * Report Scheduler Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Report Managers and Queues - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Report Managers and Queues - 2 Online This is Session 13 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Selling From an Alternate Warehouse Online This class shows you how to create the linkage between warehouses so that you can sell from an alternate warehouse when your home warehouse is out of stock and it demonstrates the sales process involved. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Special Price Type Discounts Online This course discusses what a special price type discount is, then how to create and test one within the SX.enterprise application. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Storage Areas and Extents - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Storage Areas and Extents - 2 Online This is Session 16 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Supplier Link - Setups Part 1 Online This is the first in a 2-part series on Supplier Link setups. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SX.Development - Part 1 Classroom The course in SX Enterprise Development is a course designed to explain the concepts of customizing the GUI portion of the SX Enterprise product. The course has been split into two parts. This class represents the first portion focusing on the AppBuilder, SmartObjects, and Progress functionality in GUI.
If you are a KnowledgeZone subscriber of 50+ users, this class is included in your subscription price. Otherwise you will receive a work order for the price of the class.
Distribution SX.e: SX.Development - Part 2 Classroom The course in SX Enterprise Development is a course designed to explain the concepts of customizing the GUI portion of the SX Enterprise product. The course has been split into two parts. This class represents the second portion focusing on the SX.e Smartobjects - developing with the Infor Containers and the user hook strategy.
If you are a KnowledgeZone subscriber of 50+ users, this class is included in your subscription price. Otherwise you will receive a work order for the price of the class.
Distribution SX.e: SX.enterprise Concepts - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SX.enterprise Concepts - 2 Online This is Session 5 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SX.enterprise Standard Scripts Online This is Session 2 of 5 for the MARC - SX.enterprise Scripts Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SXenterprise - How Storage Areas Help Online This is the SX.enterprise Database Storage Areas Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SXenterprise - Migration Online This is the SX.enterprise Database Storage Areas Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SXenterprise - New Storage Area Model Online This is the SX.enterprise Database Storage Areas Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SXenterprise - OpenEdge 10 Online This is the SX.enterprise Database Storage Areas Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: SXenterprise - Understanding Database Extents Online This is the SX.enterprise Database Storage Areas Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Profiles Online This course is designed to introduce a System Administrator to the concepts of profiles and familiarize them with how to set up new operators in SX.enterprise. What to Expect
  • To understand how to set up profiles and new operators.
Areas Covered
  • Operator file types
  • Creating Profiles
  • Setting up and maintaining operators
Audience - New user. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Adding or Modifying Report Schedules 1 Online Adding or Modifying Report Schedules Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Adding or Modifying Report Schedules 2 Online Adding or Modifying Report Schedules Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Assigning an Operator to a Profile Online Assigning an Operator to a Profile Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Changing the Run Date and Time of a Print Job 1 Online Changing the Run date and Time of a Print Job Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Changing the Run Date and Time of a Print Job 2 Online Changing the Run date and Time of a Print Job Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Copying Operators 1 Online Copying Operators Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Copying Operators 2 Online Copying Operators Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Creating and Saving a Profile 1 Online Creating and Saving a Profile Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Creating and Saving a Profile 2 Online Creating and Saving a Profile Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Deleting a Print Job 1 Online Deleting a Print Job Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Deleting a Print Job 2 Online Deleting a Print Job Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - SA Profiles and User Setup Online SA Profiles and User Setup Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Setting Up Print Queues 1 Online Setting Up Print Queues Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: System Administrator Training Guide - Setting Up Print Queues 2 Online Setting Up Print Queues Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Consolidated Invoicing Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Consolidated Invoicing Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Financials Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Financials Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - GUI Big Picture Slides Online GUI Big Picture Slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Hardware Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Hardware Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Job Management Enhancements v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Job Management Enhancements Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - MiscellaneousTB Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 MiscellaneousTB Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Order Entry Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Order Entry Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - PO-WT-IC Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 PO-WT-IC Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Training Guide - Value Add Entry Transaction Migration to GUI Overview v5.1 Online SX.e 5.1 Value Add Entry Transaction Migration to GUI Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: TWL Scripts Online This is Session 3 of 5 for the MARC - SX.enterprise Scripts Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Understanding Database Extents - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Understanding Database Extents - 2 Online This is Session 15 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: UNIX - Database Workshop - 1 Online This is the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of 18 courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise . Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: UNIX - Database Workshop - 2 Online This is Session 14 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: UNIX - Infor Installation Standards and Progress 9x Log Files Online This is Session 9 of 18 for the Progress Database Administrator Series. This series of courses is designed to compliment the System Administrator classroom class. You may choose to use these sessions as advanced preparation or as review for the Sys Admin class, however; this series WAS NOT designed as stand-alone instruction for becoming a System Administrator for SX.enterprise. Please visit our Customer Care web page (http://customercare.nxtrend.com/) to register for the System Administrator classroom portion of this material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Adding Freight to a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Add Freight to a Purchase Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Applying Customer Payment to an Invoice Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply a Single Payment to a Customer Invoice. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Assigning Serial Numbers During Shipping Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating to Assign Serial Numbers during Shipping Feedback. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Canceling a Line Item Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate the process of canceling a line item from a sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 15 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Canceling a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Cancel a Purchase Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Canceling a Sales Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate the process of canceling a sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Changing a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Modify a Purchase Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Changing Existing Orders Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Maintain and make changes to an existing Sales Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Converting a Quote to a Pricing Record Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to convert a customer quote into a pricing record. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Converting a Quote to a Sales Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to convert a customer quote into a Stock Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Copying a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Copy a Purchase Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Copying a Sales Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Copy a Sales Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Creating a Line Comment Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to add comments to a line items of a sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course. 
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Customer Search Overview Online This is an interactive simulation on the demonstrating the Customer Inquiry Overview. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Counter Sales Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Counter Sale Order including tendering payment. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Direct Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Direct Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Drop Ship Line Item Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to source a line item by sourcing one line item a time and by using the multi-line sourcing function. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Non-Stock Product Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a non-stock product on sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Purchase Order using the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Quote Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a customer quote order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Return Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a Return Sales Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Stock Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to Enter a Customer Stock Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering a Warehouse Transfer Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Warehouse Transfer. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to Enter Add-on Charges to a Sales Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Manually Tie Line Item to Source Document Online The Purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to manually tie a sales order line item to a source document.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Product Availability Overview Online This is an interactive simulation on the demonstrating the Product Availability Inquiry Overview. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Receiving a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Receive a Purchase Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Receiving a Warehouse Transfer Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Receive a Warehouse Transfer. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Sales Order Inquiry with Order Information Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating the process of Searching for a Sales Order When you have the order information. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Sales Order Inquiry without Order Information Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating the process of Searching for a Sales Order without the order information. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course. E
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Shipping a Warehouse Transfer Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Ship a Warehouse Transfer. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10.0.1. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v10.0.1 Vendor Search Overview Online This is an interactive simulation on the demonstrating the Vendor Inquiry Overview. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 10X. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Accepting the Replenishment Action Report Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Accept the PO RRAR. This training is applicable to the following: Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Adding Freight to a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Add Freight Charges to a Purchase Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Creating a Line Comment Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to add comments to a line item of a sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Credit Memo Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Credit Memo to a customer’s account. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10-minute, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Miscellaneous Credit for a Customer Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Misc. Credit to a customer’s account. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Non-Stock Product Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a non-stock product on sales order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course. 
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Quote Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a customer quote order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Return Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to enter a Return Sales Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Return Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Return Merchandise PO. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering a Stock Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to Enter a Customer Stock Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version 6.1.090.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering Add On Charges to a Sales Order Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to Enter Addon Charges to a Sales Order. This training is applicable to the following; Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Entering Warehouse Transfers Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Warehouse Transfer. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Merging the Replenishment Action Report Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Merge the PO RRAR. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Receiving a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Receive a Purchase Order. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6 Running the Replenishment Action Report Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Run the PO RRAR. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Applying Credits to an Invoice Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply AR Credits to Customer Invoices. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Applying Customer Payment Using Split Checks Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply a Customer Payment Using a Split Check. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Applying Miscellaneous Cash Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply Miscellaneous Cash using the AR module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Applying Single Payment to Multi Invoices Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Apply a Single Payment to Multiple Customer Invoices. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course. 
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Canceling a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Cancel Purchase Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Entering a Debit Memo Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Debit Memo in AR. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minute, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: v6.1.090 Entering a Purchase Order Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Enter a Purchase Order within the PO Module. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minutes, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Accounts Receivable Changes Online The SX.e 5.5 Release Financial Changes series encompasses an overview of several of the enhancements to the Accounts Receivable (AR), Accounts Payable (AP), and General Ledger (GL) and Check Reconciliation (CR) modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for these courses and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Financial Changes Online The SX.e 5.5 Release Financial Changes series encompasses an overview of several of the enhancements to the Accounts Receivable (AR), Accounts Payable (AP), and General Ledger (GL) and Check Reconciliation (CR) modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for these courses and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Financial Changes Introduction Online The SX.e 5.5 Release Financial Changes series encompasses an overview of several of the enhancements to the Accounts Receivable (AR), Accounts Payable (AP), and General Ledger (GL) and Check Reconciliation (CR) modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for these courses and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 General Ledger and Check Reconciliation Changes Online The SX.e 5.5 Release Financial Changes series encompasses an overview of several of the enhancements to the Accounts Receivable (AR), Accounts Payable (AP), and General Ledger (GL) and Check Reconciliation (CR) modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for these courses and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 IC Changes Online This is the SX.e 5.5 Release PO, IC, and WT series. This course provides an overview of several changes made to the PO, IC, and WT modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for this series and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Miscellaneous TBs Online This SX.e 5.5 Release Miscellaneous TBs course encompasses an overview of several miscellaneous TBs. TBs presented in this course are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for these courses and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Multiple Miscellaneous Credits in ARECE Online Multiple Miscellaneous Credits in ARECE in SX.e 5.5 allows companies the option of resequencing credits remaining after being applied to an invoice in cash posting. This is an overview of the ARECE redesign allowing for prior SX.e 4.3 logic. The Multiple Miscellaneous Credits in ARECE Project Review can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 Order Entry Changes Online This course provides an overview of several of the Order Entry module changes in the SX.e 5.5 release. The enhancements covered in this course should not be considered all-inclusive of all TBs and bug fixes in the 5.5 release. For a complete listing of all TBs and bug fixes, run a Living Release Manual from Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview serves as a guideline for this course and can be downloaded from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Click the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index to view the SX.e 5.5 Release Overview and many of the SX.e 5.5 Release Project Reviews. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 PO Changes Online This is the SX.e 5.5 Release PO, IC, and WT series. This course provides an overview of several changes made to the PO, IC, and WT modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for this series and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 PO, IC, WT Changes Online This is the SX.e 5.5 Release PO, IC, and WT series. This course provides an overview of several changes made to the PO, IC, and WT modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for this series and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Version 5.5 WT Changes Online This is the SX.e 5.5 Release PO, IC, and WT series. This course provides an overview of several changes made to the PO, IC, and WT modules. TBs presented in this series are not all inclusive of all enhancements and bug fixes for the 5.5 release. For a listing of all 5.5 release changes, please run the Living Release Manual available on Customer Care - TBs web page. The SX.e 5.5 Release Overview has been used as a guideline for this series and can be obtained from the Customer Care - Documentation web page. Select the New SX.e Documentation link on the left index. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: What is SX.Architect? Overview Online This is an explanatory session created to provide an overview of what the SX.Architect tool is, when a customer would need it, and what the tool consists of. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: What's Up Doc Online WHERE do I begin looking for documentation on the SX.enterprise software? HOW do I do my job? WHAT is that field used for? Then, you'll want to review the What's Up Doc class!  Learn how to use the SX.e Online Help system and Infor365 Online Support to answer your questions about the SX.e software. This class is NOT just for the champions in your organization EVERYONE can become MORE self-sufficient by knowing HOW to answer their own questions. It's only an hour -- so come, learn ... and be empowered! Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: Writing Off AR Short Payments Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Write Off AR Customer Short Payments. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minute, self-paced course.
Distribution SX.e: Writing Off Sales Tax Online This is an interactive simulation demonstrating how to Write Off Sales Tax When Posting a Customer Payment. This training is applicable to the following Infor Distribution SX.e GUI version: 6.1.090. This is a 10 minute, self-paced course. 
Distribution SX.e: WTEI - General Receiving, Exception Handling Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: WTES - Addon on Header Tab Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: WTES - Change Quantities Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: WTES - Serialized Product Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: WTES - Ship/Receive Direct Warehouse Transfer Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
Distribution SX.e: WTES - Shipping Cancel Shipping Work Online This course concentrates on the Shipping and Receiving process as done in the warehouse in SX.enterprise GUI. This is a migration class - for an existing character user making the move to graphical. A prerequisite to this course is SX.e GUI Big Picture class. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
EAM: Advanced Reporting Tool - Introduction Online The purpose of this course is to introduce learners to report authoring using Infor EAM Advanced Reporting. The course previews the three main components of Infor's Advanced Reporting solution powered by Cognos: the Advanced Reporting portal, Report Studio, and Query Studio. This training is applicable for the following: Infor EAM 11 and all previous versions.
EAM: After-Class Mentoring Classroom These virtual sessions allow you to work one on one with the instructor who taught your training class. Time can be used for refresher training, training on areas not covered in past training classes, train end users on specific topics, or to discuss any implementation tasks needing assistance with. In addition, time can be spent defining Key Performance Indicators or determining which reports would be most useful for specific customer needs. Where needed, multiple sessions can be planned in advance.
Price listed is per hour for up to four hours.
EAM: Basic Navigation Online The purpose of this course is to provide basic navigation steps for front-end users of EAM. This training is applicable for the following: Infor EAM 10.1.2 and all previous versions.
EAM: Configuration and System Planning Classroom This course covers base configuration requirements, critical configuration requirements administration, and general functional overview. The training is applicable for the following Infor EAM version(s): 10.1.2 and later. This is a 5-day instructor-led course. Previous course name: Infor EAM 10 Configuration & System Planning. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
EAM: Foundation Classroom This course provides hands-on training in the essential core function of the Infor EAM application suite, including overview training in the most commonly implemented optional functions. This training is for version 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous Course Name: Infor EAM 10 Overview  Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
EAM: Fundamentos (Brazilian Portuguese) Classroom Este curso fornece um treinamento prático das principais funções do pacote de aplicativos Infor EAM, incluindo um treinamento geral das funções opcionais mais implementadas. Este treinamento é destinado à versão 10.1 e todas as versões anteriores. Clique AQUI para obter a descrição do curso e agenda.
EAM: Fundamentos (Spanish) Classroom Este curso proporciona una formación práctica en la función esencial del núcleo de la suite de aplicaciones de Infor EAM, en la que se incluye la información general de formación en las funciones opcionales más comúnmente implementadas. Esta formación corresponde a la versión 10.1 y todas las versiones anteriores. Haga clic AQUI para ver la descripción del curso y la agenda.
EAM: Integration - Basic Classroom This course introduces participants to the integration process for EAM, with particular focus on the use of the upload utility to initiate the integration. This training is for version 10.1.2 and all previous versions. This course is a two-day instructor-led course. Click here to view course description.
EAM: Integration - Intermediate Classroom This course covers integrating EAM database applications and servers via Databridge and ION. A general EAM integration solution is provided and customization is not addressed. This training is for version 10.1.2 and Databridge 3.x and later. This course is a 5-day instructor-led course. Click here to view course description and agenda.
EAM: Introduction Online
The purpose of this course is to provide a general introduction to the core function of the Infor EAM application. This training is applicable for the following Infor EAM version(s): 10.1.2 and all previous versions. This course is an eLearning course.
EAM: Managing Projects with EAM Online The purpose of this course is to instruct participants on the process used to manage projects within EAM. This training is applicable for the following Infor EAM version(s): 10.1.2 and all previous versions.
EAM: Managing Projects with the Microsoft Project Interface Online The purpose of this course is to instruct participants on the process used to manage projects within EAM using the Microsoft Project interface. This training is applicable for the following Infor EAM version(s): 10.1.2 and all previous versions. This course is a one-hour, eLearning course.
EAM: Scheduling Work Order/Work Order Daily Online This course covers scheduling instructions for EAM Work Order Scheduling and EAM Daily Scheduling. This training is for version(s): Infor EAM 10.1.2 and all previous versions.
EAM: Standard Installation Classroom This course outlines the procedures for installing an Infor EAM database (SQL/ORACLE), application and Report Servers. This training is for version 10.1.2 and all previous versions. Click here to view course description and agenda.
EAM: Subscription v10 Online The Infor EAM Subscription Library includes self-paced eLearning courses that supplement the classroom experience, and help build confident, self-reliant users. The subscription includes two types of eLearning - courses and simulations. Courses combine overviews of new concepts, theories, and processes with demonstrations of key functions and practice exercises. Simulations provide step-by-step instruction on how to complete common processes across the application.
EAM: System Administration Introduction Online The purpose of this course is to introduce the fundamentals of EAM system administration including defining installation parameters, system codes, custom fields, cost codes, documents, and classes. This training is applicable for the following: Infor EAM 10.1.2 and all previous versions.
EAM: Using KPI, Inbox, Flex and Grid Designer Classroom This course is designed to give an administrative user the knowledge to write KPIs and Inboxes to help with benchmarking, organizational trends, real time supply information and other critical factors. Flex SQL will help manipulate the system to work with customers required business processes. Grid Designer will supply the data you need on one screen for querying and reporting functionality. Previous Course Name: Infor EAM 10 KPI, Inbox, Flex and Grid Designer
EAM: Using Mobile Classroom This course introduces participants to the Mobile application as part of EAM, including installing, setting up and operating EAM Mobile. This training is for version 10.1.2 and all previous versions. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
EAM: Using the Advanced Reporting Tool Classroom This advanced course describes how to use Infor EAM reporting capabilities to their highest level. Participants learn how to create and modify reports using Cognos-based Infor EAM Advanced Reporting. Previous Course Name: Infor EAM 10 Advanced Reporting
EPAK: Developing in EPAK Classroom EPAK Developer Training is a three-day training class that teaches the basics of how to author content using the EPAK Developer tool.
Fourth Shift: Accounts Payable Overview Classroom In these two 4 hours sessions, you will learn how to perform critical A/P tasks such as entering and matching invoices, processing check runs, searching for A/P information using the inquiry screens, and reconciling vouchered and unvouchered A/P. In addition, you will gain an overall understanding of how accounts payable information is generated and flows through a manufacturing firm.
Fourth Shift: Accounts Receivable Overview Classroom In these two four hour sessions, learn how to process invoices and credit memos, produce A/R trial balances, process cash receipts, and much more. This informative class is geared towards anyone with invoicing, cash application or collection responsibilities. You will be given ample opportunity to practice what you've learned through relevant hands-on exercises.
Fourth Shift: Administering the Database and SQL Server Classroom This two-day class is an absolute necessity if you are migrating
from a Titanium to SQL database. Learn how to use the tools
available in Fourth Shift and SQL Server to administer your
Fourth Shift database and get the most from your SQL Server.
This class is perfect for system administrators who are already
familiar with Fourth Shift administration tasks but need to learn
more about the SQL database.
Fourth Shift: Backflushing Classroom This four hour workshop focuses on how to use the Repetitive Manufacturing module to backflush using one of four available methods in Fourth Shift. Backflushing can substantially reduce the amount of time spent counting material and reporting usage to production orders, while still maintaining inventory accuracy when properly used.
Fourth Shift: Cash Management Overview Classroom This course takes an in depth look at the Cash Management module.
This course will explain the key functionality of Cash Management,
navigating the screens (including bank reconciliation), and steps taken to complete
the Update Cash Management or installation process.
Fourth Shift: Custom Products Manufacturing Module Overview Classroom This four hour workshop focuses on the Custom Products Manufacturing module which provides enhanced capabilities for processing manufacturing orders in a non-standard product situation such as make to order, configure to order or prototype environments.
Fourth Shift: Determining Planning Parameters Classroom This workshop explores various criteria used to determine appropriate planning parameters for both production and purchased items.
Fourth Shift: Developing and Administering Visiwatch Classroom This is an in-depth training class designed to provide the latest information on developing and administering VisiWatch applications in the real world. You will become familiar with VisiWatch's features, functions, and capabilities and understand how this tool can help you solve common business problems. Time is allotted to discuss topics not directly addressed in the class syllabus.
Fourth Shift: Entering Customer Orders Classroom Learn how to efficiently and accurately process customer orders in this one-day introductory class. You will master critical order entry functions such as setting up new customers, adding pricing and credit information, and checking available-to-promise information. When you have completed this class, you will understand how effective order entry impacts the rest of the manufacturing system and can help improve on-time delivery.
Fourth Shift: Foundation Business Views Overview Classroom Find out how the Foundation Business Views can simplify your job as a report writer or programmer. You'll learn efficient methods for creating new views and using the sample templates, stored procedures and user-defined functions to get at information critical to running your business. Learn why querying the database using Foundation Business Views is the quickest and easiest way to extract data from your SQL database.
Fourth Shift: Implementing a Master Production Schedule Classroom This four hour workshop focuses on how to model and implement a Master Production Schedule of either top-level saleable items or lower-level sub-assemblies in order to meet Sales and Inventory plan requirements.
Fourth Shift: In a Nutshell Classroom Class: Fourth Shift In A Nutshell
Fourth Shift: Introduction to Financials Classroom If you wish to gain a broad understanding of how the financial modules work within Fourth Shift, this class is for you. This class will explain how transactions flow from the manufacturing side to the financial side of the software system and how the general ledger is impacted by certain transactions. You will learn how to create and post journal entries, create an appropriate organization structure and obtain timely financial information from the system. You'll also learn how to identify sources of costs and variances and how to perform month or year-end closings.
The last day of this class will be devoted to enabling you to use tools provided with the General Ledger Module to modify and create standard financial reports and to validate those reports.
Fourth Shift: Introduction to Manufacturing Classroom This popular class is the perfect starting point for anyone who needs a comprehensive overview of the manufacturing process. This class will enable you to see the "big picture" and how the components of the manufacturing system work together. You will learn how the system handles transactions from the time a customer order is taken until the product is shipped out the door.
Fourth Shift: Introduction to the System Classroom This introductory class is designed with the beginning Fourth Shift user in mind. You will quickly learn how to navigate your way through the system and use the Help screens to answer common questions. You will follow the flow of a typical order through the system, beginning with the sales forecast and ending with shipment to the customer. You will learn how the system balances supplies and demands and how to perform basic MRP calculations.
This class is an excellent introduction to the Fourth Shift software that stresses the inter-relationship between the manufacturing and financial sides of the system and the importance of each individual and department in ensuring the accuracy and integrity of the system.
Fourth Shift: Lot Trace/Serialization Overview Classroom This eight hour workshop focuses on how to maintain lot integrity of raw materials from the supplier, throughout the manufacturing process and to the consumer level.
Fourth Shift: Manufacturing Accounting Foundation Classroom Are you looking for ways to improve your company's productivity, profitability, and customer lead-time? This information-packed course will enable you to more effectively use your Fourth Shift system in managing your day-to-day operations. You will learn techniques for order management, schedule stability, message reduction and improvements on inventory turns. You will identify how to manage different stocking strategies in order to be more responsive to customer requests. You will have the opportunity to discuss topics such as creative bills of resources, material shortage analysis, and capacity planning with the instructor and share ideas with other Fourth Shift users. Additional time is allocated for advanced level questions and discussion.
Fourth Shift: Order Processing Overview Classroom 2 full day in traditional class
Fourth Shift: Performing SQL 2005 Maintenance Classroom This two session class of four hours each will teach you how to perform basic maintenance
tasks that are required to keep your Fourth Shift SQL
database performing well.
Fourth Shift: Receiving Details Overview Classroom This workshop covers steps involved in the purchase order receiving process, as well as the steps involved in receiving finished goods associated with a manufacturing order.
Fourth Shift: Sales Analysis Overview Classroom 2 full day in traditional class
Fourth Shift: Setting Up Budgets and Plans Classroom This course will provide you with information on how to utilize Fourth Shift functionality to enter a budget or plan. Step-by-step instructions will be given on how to define a budget, how to extract a list of master accounts, how to import the budget using the Fourth Shift Import Module, and how to generate reports to review the budget.
Fourth Shift: Shipping Details Overview Classroom In this workshop, you will learn the best techniques for processing shipments of Customer Orders using the CUSM and SHPM modules in Fourth Shift. This workshop does not cover the use of the Sales Order Processing Module.
The workshop includes review of the following topics:
 Review process for Shipping messages in the Stockroom Action (STAD) window
 Printing Shipping Pick lists, box labels and shipping documentation
 Use of the Auto-Pack and Auto-Ship features in the SHIP window
 Processing Shipments and Reverse Shipments from the SHIP window
 Generation of a Bill of Lading from the Shipping Bill of Lading (SBOL) window
 Use of the Shipping Inquiry (SHPI) window to provide shipment detail and tracking information for shipments
Fourth Shift: SQL Reporting Services Foundation Classroom This comprehensive three-day class covers all aspects of Microsoft
SQL Reporting Services (SRS) from installation to administration
and shows you how to create visually appealing reports
with ease and accuracy. You will gain an understanding of alternative
and current reporting technologies and how they compare with
SQL Reporting Services. You will learn about the layout and
function of Business Intelligence Reports and how data can be
obtained using Foundation Business Views.
Learn first-hand how to extract data using Query Builder
and master key tools such as the Report Wizard
and Report Manager.
Discover how this powerful reporting solution can
improve decision-making and facilitate communication within your company.
Fourth Shift: Using Bill of Material Coding Techniques Classroom This four hour workshop focuses on the various Bill of Material coding techniques enhancing the capabilities of Fourth Shift to provide information to users throughout the system. Techniques will be discussed to enhance the Routing, create visibility on the production floor of acceptable options concerning material and resources during production, provide enhanced picklist detail for material handlers and provide management with easy visibility of plant-wide capacity utilization.
Fourth Shift: Using FSTI to Automate Imports Classroom How do I get data into the Fourth Shift system? Come and learn how to insert, delete or update your system in real-time from almost any programming language. Using the Fourth Shift Transaction Interface (FSTI) Software Development Kit (SDK), programmers can write custom interactive programs and web applications that automate many common tasks or combine Fourth Shift functions with external applications.
Fourth Shift: Using the Engineering Module Classroom Are you using the Engineering module to its full potential? Discover how you can use Fourth Shift to record your product design specifications and configure the product from a design concept. You will learn how to use the Engineering module's features for rapid processing of product development and product changes and how to fully define a product bill for revision tracking.
Fourth Shift: Using the G/L Report Writer Classroom Learn to design and create custom reports that will provide you with the critical financial information you need to run your business. This class will enable you to use the tools provided with the General Ledger module to create, modify, and validate standard financial reports. This class is incorporated into the Introduction to Financials class or may be taken as a stand-alone class.
Fourth Shift: Using the Purchasing Module Classroom If you have purchasing responsibilities at your company, you'll definitely want to attend this class. Learn how the purchasing and related modules can be used to identify purchasing requirements, source suppliers, create purchase orders, and monitor vendor performance. Whether you're a purchasing expert or novice, you'll come away from this class with the ability to perform your job more efficiently and effectively.
Fourth Shift: Using the Shop Floor Module Classroom This four hour workshop focuses on how the Shop Floor Tracking and Reporting module will keep your production operation running smoothly by providing critical information to detect capacity problems and material shortages, manage order schedules, routing and work in process.
Fourth Shift: Visibar Scripting Foundation Classroom Discover the power and rich functionality available in the VisiBar product. In this information-packed 5-day class you will learn, among other things, how to install and configure VisiBar, design and write VisiBar scripts, and print reports and labels. The student will participate by completing several exercises designed to teach VisiBar functions and scripting solutions.
Fourth Shift: Workplace Plus Foundation Classroom This three-day introductory course prepares you to install, operate, administer, and customize the Workplace Plus module. You will learn to create custom role-based portals, integrate other websites into your workspace and customize the look, feel, and function of your Fourth Shift website. This class has a heavy emphasis on hands-on exercises to reinforce your learning.
HMS: Application Configuration for Channel Partners (IPN) Classroom APPLICATION CONFIGURATION (5 DAYS) The Configuration Session is conducted onsite by the Application Consultant, followed by the Training Sessions. During this session you will receive an overview of the Hospitality Management System (HMS), review the completed Configuration Workbook and input the property’s specific database configuration. Management and decision-makers should attend this session.
HMS: Build Your Own Hotel (IPN) Classroom BUILD YOUR OWN HOTEL (3 DAYS) Day 1: Hands-on - Build your own hotel Day 2: Hands-on - Build your own hotel Day 3: Re-cap and Q&A
HMS: End User Training (IPN) Classroom END USER TRAINING (7 DAYS) End user training takes place in a classroom environment (away from operations) with workstations for the specific task of training the application functions. Attendees are taught the functions used to maintain accounts (profiles, reservations, front desk, cashier, accounts receivable etc.) and related tasks. This allows the opportunity to simulate live operational scenarios. A maximum of eight attendees should be scheduled per class. Some of these sessions will be repeated multiple times to accommodate the property staff schedules. The sessions are as follows: Day 1: Introduction/ Guest and Organization Profiles/Reservations Day 2: Reservations cont/ Front Desk Day 3: Front Desk cont/Cashier/ Foreign Currency Day 4: EOD/ Housekeeping & Engineering/ Booking Agent Profiles Day 5: Groups/ Events Day 6: Accounts Receivables Profiles/ Accounts Receivables Day 7: Revenue Management/ Forms/ Misc/ GO LIVE/ Q&A Reporting
HMS: Technical Installation for Channel Partners (IPN) Classroom
TECHNICAL INSTALLATION (5 Days)

Day 1: Systems Admin and server scoping/ DB server/ App server
Day 2: Report server/ Vault server
Day 3: Liaison/ Central Liaison
Day 4: Configuring interfaces: IPU devices, native Liaison devices and CRS
Day 5: Troubleshooting
Infor Advanced Scheduling: Using the Application Classroom This training course catalog will provide users with detailed information, knowledge and hands-on training on various features and functionality in Infor Advanced Scheduling. The training course is also intended to enable users to explore various features and enhance the value derived from the application. The training course material for Infor Advanced Scheduling is based on a fictitious process manufacturing factory. It is divided into ten different sets or chapters based on topics and functional area. This classroom-style training course catalog can be categorized into three major components: presentations, exercises and data files.
Infor BI: ImportMaster verwenden Classroom Mithilfe dieser Schulung werden die grundlegenden Merkmale und Funktionen von Infor BI ImportMaster vorgestellt und den Teilnehmern das grundlegende Wissen zum Importieren von Daten aus einer Reihe von Quellsystemen in eine multidimensionale OLAP-Datenbank vermittelt. Diese Schulung ist für die folgenden Infor BI Versionen vorgesehen: 10.4 und alle nachfolgenden Versionen. Die Schulung wird von einem Dozenten geleitet und dauert zwei Tage. Klicken Sie hier, um die Kursbeschreibung und die Tagesordnung anzuzeigen.
Infor BI: Modeling OLAP Business Rules Classroom This course provides advanced Infor BI OLAP users with a series of examples on how to program Infor BI OLAP databases to handle complex, yet common, business problems. This training is for version 10.4 and all later versions. 
Click here to view course description and agenda.
Infor BI: Modellierung von OLAP und Geschäftsregeln Classroom Diese Schulung bietet fortgeschrittenen Benutzern von Infor BI OLAP eine Reihe Beispiele dazu, wie sie Infor BI OLAP-Datenbanken programmieren und auf diese Weise komplexe, jedoch häufig auftretende geschäftliche Problemstellungen bewältigen können. Diese Schulung bezieht sich auf Version 10.4 sowie alle höheren Versionen. Klicken Sie HIER, um die Kursbeschreibung und die Tagesordnung anzuzeigen.
Infor BI: Office Plus verwenden – Grundlagen Classroom Diese Schulung führt Sie in die grundlegenden Office Plus-Prozesse ein, die zum Erstellen und Analysieren von Daten in Ad-hoc-Berichten, Alea Ad-hoc-Berichten und Formelberichten erforderlich sind. Diese Schulung bezieht sich auf Version 10.4 sowie alle vorhergehenden Versionen. Klicken Sie HIER, um die Kursbeschreibung und die Tagesordnung anzuzeigen.
Infor BI: Using Application Studio - Basic Classroom This course provides an introduction to the basic features of Application Studio and the processes required to create fixed reports, as well as more advanced dynamic reports. This training is for version 10.4 and all later versions. Click here to view course description and agenda.
Infor BI: Using Application Studio Dashboards - Advanced Classroom In this training you learn how to turn multiple Application Studio reports and Web content into attractive dashboards. You will learn how to optimize Application Studio reports in order to merge and synchronize them into interactive, resizable dashboards.
Infor BI: Using Consolidation Classroom This course introduces the features and functionality of Infor BI Consolidation, including the main structures in the consolidation process, configuration settings in Infor BI Designer, steps in the consolidation process, and standard consolidated data reports. This training is for version 10.4 and all later versions.  Click here to view course description and agenda.
Infor BI: Using ImportMaster Classroom This course provides an introduction to the basic features and functionality of Infor BI ImportMaster and provides learners with the foundational knowledge needed to import data from a variety of operational systems to a multidimensional OLAP database. This training is applicable for the following Infor BI version(s): 10.4 and all later versions. This is a two-day instructor-led course. Click here to view course description and agenda.
Infor BI: Using Office Plus - Basic Classroom This course provides an introduction to the basic Office Plus processes required to create and analyze data in ad-hoc reports, Alea ad-hoc reports, and formula reports. This training is for version 10.4 and all later versions. This course is a two-day, instructor-led course. Click here to view course description and agenda.
Infor Distribution Storeroom: Installation and Configuration (v2) Online Storeroom Installer Upgrade Path Language Packs and Localization Storeroom Logout & Switch Customer
Infor Ming.le: Creating Stream Templates in Infor Ming.le Online This course will provide Ming.le end-users the necessary information to allow them to create templates necessary for the use of the Stream feature in Infor Ming.le.
Infor Ming.le: Enterprise Overview Online This course provides an overview of Infor Ming.le, as recorded from an introductory conference call.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Infor Ming.le Enterprise with Active Directory Online This course demonstrates the steps to install Infor Ming.le Enterprise on a server that uses Active Directory. Before taking this course, you should have already taken courses on Infor Ming.le Prerequisites, Installing Microsoft SQL Server, and Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010. This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Infor Ming.le Enterprise with ADFS Online This course demonstrates how to install Infor Ming.le Enterprise on a server with ADFS.
You will prepare the server for installation, and install and configure Infor Ming.le Enterprise.
Before taking this course, you should complete the courses on Infor Ming.le prerequisites, Installing Microsoft SQL Server, and Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010.
This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Infor Ming.le Foundation with Active Directory Online This course demonstrates the steps to install Infor Ming.le Foundation on a server that uses Active Directory. Before taking this course, you should have already taken courses on Infor Ming.le Prerequisites, Installing Microsoft SQL Server, and Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010. This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Infor Ming.le Foundation with ADFS Online This course demonstrates how to install Infor Ming.le Foundation on a server with ADFS.
You will prepare the server for installation, and install and configure Infor Ming.le Foundation.
Before taking this course, you should complete the courses on Infor Ming.le prerequisites, Installing Microsoft SQL Server, and Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010.
This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010 Online This course provides you with general concepts about Microsoft SharePoint. It also provides step-by-step information on how to install SharePoint, apply SharePoint service packs and patches, and install additional language support. This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administration level users.
Infor Ming.le: Installing Microsoft SQL Server Online This course demonstrates the steps to install Microsoft SQL Server as it is to be configured to use with Infor Ming.le. This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Prerequisites for Installing Infor Ming.le Online This course describes what you need before installing Infor Ming.le.
Infor Ming.le: Upgrading to Infor Ming.le Enterprise Online This course demonstrates how to upgrade an Infor Workstation installation to Infor Ming.le Enterprise.
In this course, you will see how to perform the upgrade, set security settings, use the Configuration Wizard, integrate with ION, import and activate the document flow, and set the document settings.
Before taking this course, you should complete the courses on Infor Ming.le prerequisites, Installing Microsoft SQL Server, and Installing Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010.
This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Upgrading to Infor Ming.le Foundation Online This course demonstrates how to upgrade an Infor Workspace installation without SocialSpace to Infor Ming.le Foundation.
In this course, you will see how to perform the upgrade and use the Configuration Wizard.
This course is intended for advanced and/or System Administrator level users.
Infor Ming.le: Using Streams in Infor Ming.le Online This course will provide end-users information on how to use the Steams feature of the Infor Ming.le product.
Infor Portal Foundation: Using Datasource and Collection Definitions Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of the Datasource and Collection definitions in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is a 10 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0159_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using Layout Alert and AlterFilter Events Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of the Layout Alert and AlterFilter events in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 8 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0163_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using Layout Definitions with Scripting Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of layout definitions with scripting in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 8 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0162_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using Page Sets Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of page sets in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is a 5 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0165_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Editable Originator and Feature Activation Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of the Editable Originator functionality and Feature Activation in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 8 minute self-paced eLearning course.
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Field Display Format Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of the Field Display format in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 7 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0161_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Grid Online The purpose of this course is to explore the Grid application used within Infor Portal Foundation web portals. This training is applicable to the following Infor SyteLine version: 10.0. This course is a 6-minute, self-paced course.
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Layout Editor Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of the Layout Editor in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 8 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0156_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Portal Manager Online The purpose of this course is to explore the Portal Manager application used to configure, manage, and monitor Infor Portal Foundation web portals. This training is applicable to the following Infor SyteLine version: 10.0. This course is a 20-minute, self-paced course.
Infor Portal Foundation: Using the Portal Manager Diagnostics Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of Portal Manager Diagnostics in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 9 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0157_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using User Defined Styles & Style Families Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of user-defined styles and style families in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is an 6 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0164_SYT)
Infor Portal Foundation: Using Web Parts and Site Pages Online The purpose of this course is to explore the use of web parts and site pages in portals created with Infor Portal Foundation. This training is applicable to the following: Infor applications that use Infor Portal Foundation version 1.0 and above. This is a 4 minute self-paced eLearning course. (Course code: 02_0011000_EEN0160_SYT)
Infor Talent Science: Quick Helps Overview Online These quick help trainings walk a user through basic functionalities, such as how to invite candidates, move a candidate through a workflow, etc. Recommended Pre-requisites: General PeopleAnswers Training 1 Basics, General PeopleAnswers Training 2 Navigating the System, General PeopleAnswers Training 3 Assessment Interpretation
Infor: Absence Management - Advanced Online Absence Management - Advanced is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Project Leads, and Project Managers. Attendees will learn Leave of Absence tracking transfers and managing up-front allotments, as well as reports and purging functions.
Infor: Absence Management - Basics Online Absence Management - Basic is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Managers (Client Account, Implementation, Project), and Project Leads. Attendees will receive a high-level overview on how to set up a basic plan and follow the plan through the processing functionality.
Infor: Accessing Lawson Data Online Explore tools available to reference database tables, field names, field description, system codes, and relationships.
Infor: Accessing the Rich Client Features Online Introduces and demonstrates how to use the Rich client user interface to access Landmark and Talent Management application forms, perform actions on the forms, and tailor the user experience.
Infor: Adding and Maintaining Talent Management Users Online This course introduces key user terminology and demonstrates the process to create a new user for Talent Management.
Infor: Automating Your Absence Management Processes Online Automating Your Absence Management Processes is a 90-minute course for customers who work with Infor Human Resource Benefits and Payroll applications. Attendees will discover the best practices for processing changes and incorporating those into their weekly or semi-weekly updates.
Infor: Balancing Unemployment and Payroll Online Balancing Unemployment and Payroll is a 27-minute course for Consultants, Managers, System Administrators, Partners, and Clients. Attendees will learn about various unemployment reports, continuation forms, BSI set-up, and payroll balancing.
Infor: Compensation Management Introduction Online This course presents an overview of the Compensation Management application of Infor Talent Management, to include its core capabilities and positioning as a solution in the marketplace.
Infor: Creating Learning Plans (StepWise) Online This course describes how to take the learning approach from the Statement of Work and create a detailed learning plan.
Infor: Customizing Employee and Manager Self-Service Online Customizing Employee and Manager Self-Service is a 1-hour course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn the primary options to customize the functionality and appearance of the product for end users to meet their unique business needs.
Infor: Customizing Talent Management Online This course describes the allowed customizations to Talent Management.
Infor: Defining the IT Environment (StepWise) Online In this course you will learn how to the IT Environment work flow integrates into StepWise projects.
Infor: Defining the Statement of Work (StepWise) Online This course explains how to construct a Statement of Work from provided templates.
Infor: Establishing the IT Environment (StepWise) Online In this course you will learn how the IT Environment work flow integrates into StepWise projects.
Infor: Goal Management Introduction Online Goal Management Overview
Infor: HR Conversions - Advanced Online Advanced HR Conversions is a 75-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. It provides detailed guidelines and tips for successfully processing the most common and/or challenging conversion programs.
Infor: HR Writer - Advanced Online HR Writer - Advanced explores creating reports with the HR Writer tools and focuses on various features beyond creating just a simple report. The course was created using v8.x but the functionalities discussed still exist in v9.x.
Infor: Human Capital Management Simulations for Healthcare Organizations Online Human Capital Management Simulations for Healthcare Organizations is a 7-hour course for End Users, Power Users, and Support Staff of Infor Human Capital Management applications. Attendees will learn best practices for Healthcare Organizations using Infor business processes.
Infor: Human Resource Management Differences 9.0 - 9.0.1 Online Presents and explains the key features in the 9.0.1 release of Human Resource Management (HRM).
Infor: Implementing Employee Self-Service (ESS) Online Implementing Employee Self Service is a 1-hour course for Lawson System Administrators, HRIS Administrators, and Lawson Security Administrators. Attendees will learn how  to implement the Self Evident application, Employee Self Service on System Foundation Technology.
Infor: Implementing Lawson Security Online This course explains how to implement Lawson Security.
Infor: Implementing Talent Management and Human Resource Management Together Online This course presents an overview of key planning considerations when implementing Infor Talent Management and Infor Human Resource Management suites together.
Infor: Infor Campus Content Raven Overview Online A video overview of Infor Campus' content management system known as Content Raven. This is the system used to deliver training materials for instructor led classes on Infor Campus.
Infor: Infor Campus Overview for Customers Online A video tour of Infor Campus for Infor customers.
Infor: Infor Campus Quick Overview for Customers Online A quick video tour of Infor Campus for customers
Infor: Infor Campus SyteLine Subscription Overview Online A video overview of the SyteLine subscription and how to best use it.
Infor: Infor Innovators Reference Program Online This 10-minute course gives a high-level overview of the Infor Innovators Reference Program and a brief demo of the self-service tool to search for reference lists, request references and nominate references. Questions? Contact references@infor.com.
Infor: Infor Time Track Overview Online The purpose of this course is to provide an overview of Infor Time Track, designed for manufacturing customers using Infor BAAN/LN and Infor SyteLine ERP. It covers the overall flow of the solution and highlights some of the key features that provide immense value to customers trying to collect both labor and attendance information. This training is applicable to the following Infor systems: SyteLine version 8.03 and above or LN version 10.2.1 and above. This course is a 20-minute, self-paced course.
Infor: Learning and Development Introduction Online Learning and Development Overview.
Infor: Learning LA Developer Online
Infor Learning Accelerator Package. This course combines access to all of the Learning Accelerator courses previously found on View Central.
Infor: Managing Business Process Surveys (StepWise) Online This course describes the purpose of the business process survey.
Infor: Managing Changes (StepWise) Online This course describes how the StepWise Implementation Methodology impacts the project team.
Infor: Managing Customizations for Customers (StepWise) Online

This course describes how to manage customizations.

 

Infor: Managing Data Conversions (StepWise) Online This course is designed for all team members and explains the processes and planning of data conversion.
Infor: Managing Go Live (StepWise) Online This course explains the project activities in the lead up, cut-over and support in a project go live.
Infor: Managing Project Administration for Customers (StepWise) Online This is a course for customer project managers. Attendees will learn the tools and work packages available to the implementation project management team and how to use them in the project life cycle.
Infor: Managing Project Planning (StepWise) Online This course describes the Project Planning processes through the three Phases of the StepWise methodology. It explains the tools and work packages available to the project management team and how to use them in the project life cycle.
Infor: Managing Prototypes (StepWise) Online This course describes the steps to prototyping and how to create the prototype plan.
Infor: Managing Quality (StepWise) Online This course demonstrates how to prepare and execute the quality review meetings.
Infor: Managing Risks (StepWise) Online This course describes the steps to identify and manage risk throughout the implementation. You will also learn how to report on risks using the StepWise project database.
Infor: Managing Tests (StepWise) Online This course describes the purpose of the acceptance, system, and full-scale tests, as well as how to plan for each test cycle.
Infor: Mastering the Methodology for Customers (StepWise) Online This course designed for all roles and consists of an overview of the StepWise methodology: The phases, roles, and responsibilities.
Infor: Performance Management Introduction Online This course presents an overview of the Performance Management application of Infor Talent Management, including its core capabilities and positioning as a solution in the marketplace.
Infor: Processing and Maintaining Flex Benefits Online Processing and Maintaining Flex Benefits describes the processing considerations and maintenance involved when including a flex plan on your benefit plan setup.
Infor: Processing Deductions Online Processing Deductions is a 6-minute course that introduces enhancements to one-time deductions and one-time deduction processing, including setup and processing options. 
Infor: Processing FLSA Overtime Online Processing FLSA Overtime is a 55-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will receive an overview of FLSA (Fair Labor Standards Act) requirements for overtime calculations to establish the context for the training, as well as key setup procedures and processing options.
Infor: Purging HR Suite Data Online Purging HR Suite Data is a half-hour course for Consultants. Attendees will learn about key purging programs delivered by Lawson.
Infor: Registering for Courses on Infor Campus Online Registering for eLearning and Instructor-Led courses on Infor Campus
Infor: Setting Up LAUA Users and Groups Online Setting Up LAUA Users and Groups is a 45-minute course for Lawson System Administrators and Lawson Security Administrators. Attendees will learn the details on how to set up the user on Lawson Technology using LAUA.
Infor: Setting Up Position Management in Personnel Administration Online Setting up Position Management in Personnel Administration is a 90-minute course for customers who work with Infor Human Resource and Personnel applications. Attendees will learn how the position rules and budgets allow a wide range of flexible options.
Infor: Synchronizing Talent Management and Default Rules Online This course describes the ability to synchronize jobs, positions, and supervisors, and also the setup and impacts of job and position default rules.
Infor: Talent Acquisition Introduction Online Talent Acquisition Overview  
Infor: Talent Management Competency Management Introduction Online This course introduces the key terms and concepts of Competency Management and demonstrates the core setup and functionality.
Infor: Talent Management Introduction Online Lawson Talent Management Overview
Infor: Talent Management Technical Introduction Online This course presents an overview of key planning considerations when implementing Infor Talent Management and the Infor Human Resources Management suites together.
Infor: Tracking Applicants Online Tracking Applicants is a 45-minute course for Consultants and Project Managers. Attendees will learn the functionality in the Personnel Administration application that enables recruiters to track applicants, openings, and hires.
Infor: Tracking Competency Online Tracking Competency is a 24-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn how to track the skills, knowledge, and abilities (commonly referred to as KSA's) possessed by these individuals, as well as the qualifications for specific jobs or positions in the organization.
Infor: Training the Talent Management Project Team Online Present an overview of planning customer-facing training for LTM projects.
Infor: Transitioning the Sales Account (StepWise) Online This course describes with the internal handover meetings between the sales team and implementation team. It explains roles, responsibilities, and deliverables.
Infor: Troubleshooting Employee and Manager Self-Service Online Troubleshooting Employee and Manager Self-Service is a 22-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn the methodology and tools available for identifying and resolving errors encountered when implementing or using Employee and Manager Self-Service.
Infor: Troubleshooting the Human Resources Suite Online This course explains the methodology and tools available for identifying and resolving errors encountered when using the applications in the HR suite in a Unix/NT environment.
Infor: Using Absence Management to Track Leave of Absence Online Using Absence Management to Track Leave of Absence is a 90-minute course for customers who work with Lawson Human Resource Benefits and Payroll applications. Attendees will learn  to accurately track key dates and events that occur during the leave process.
Infor: Using Automated History Correction Online Using Automated History Correction explores the ability to use personnel actions or manual-entry methods to correct errors in employee history.
Infor: Using Benefits Automation Programs Online Using Benefits Automation Programs is a 45-minute recorded presentation that focuses on the benefit update programs which result in updates to employee benefit enrollments and (when applicable) payroll deductions.
Infor: Using Benefits Automation Rules Online Using Benefits Automation Rules is a 14-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn the setup of add, change, and termination rules which are used by the benefits application to automate the process of updating employee benefit enrollments. 
Infor: Using Benefits Enrollment Methods Online Using Benefits Enrollment Methods is a 23-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support) and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn to perform manual benefit entry, web benefit entry, and mass updates to employee benefit enrollments. 
Infor: Using Cost of Excess Life Insurance Online Using Cost of Excess Life Insurance describes the necessary set-up in the BN application and the processing (BN150) to report excess life.
Infor: Using Data Structure for Programmers & Report/Query Specialists Online This course provides the conceptual information needed to define an effective Lawson-style database and develop effective reports and queries against Lawson business data.
Infor: Using Design Studio with HR Online Using Design Studio with HR is a 15-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will receive a high-level overview of Infor Design Studio with a focus on HR-related examples. 
Infor: Using Direct Deposit Tape (U.S.) Online Direct Deposit Tape (U.S.)  examines the tape file created by Payment Print (PR160) to clarify its content and layout.
Infor: Using Domestic Partner Benefits Online Using Domestic Partner Benefits is a 30-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support) and Project Managers. Attendees will learn the proper way to handle DPB's and their set-up.
Infor: Using Employee History Online Employee History is a 30-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support) and Project Managers. Attendees will learn the key forms and files for reviewing employee history.
Infor: Using HIPAA 820 and 834 Transactions Sets Online Using HIPAA 820 and 834 Transactions Sets is a half-hour course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will review the functionality to accommodate HIPAA reporting requirements for the 820 and 834 transaction sets.
Infor: Using HR Custom Calculations (User Exits) Online Using HR Suite Custom Calculations (User Exits) is a 13-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn about custom calculation (known previously as "user exits") formulas in the Payroll and Benefits Administration applications, and  step-by-step processes for successfully implementing them.
Infor: Using Human Resources Conversion Programs Online Using Human Resources Conversion Programs is a 35-minute course for consultants and business analysts. Attendees will learn about processing and troubleshooting conversions in the Infor Human Resources suite.
Infor: Using Lawson Application 9.0.1 Data Promotion Programs Online Lawson Application 9.0.1 Data Promotion Programs is a 20-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, IS, Support, Technical), Managers (Client Account, Implementation, Project), Business Analysts, and Programmers. Attendees will learn  how the Lawson Application data is promoted from release 9.0.0 to 9.0.1 during the installation process.
Infor: Using Step and Grade Schedules Online This course explains the basics of defining step and grade schedules and the business scenarios in which they are typically used.
Infor: Using System21 with Infor 10x Online This course demonstrates the use of Infor System21 with IBM system i, featuring the use of Infor 10x, Infor Ming.le, and the SoHo interface. The demonstration walks through a typical scenario to demonstrate the basic functionality of System21.
Infor: Using Talent Management Actions Online Learn about the different types of actions available to update employee data and the key setup and processing for each type.
Infor: Using Talent Management Conversion Programs Online Describes Talent Management data conversion process, methods, and tools.
Infor: Using Talent Management Reporting Online Learn about the primary reporting options for Talent Management data.
Infor: Using the M3 Converter Tool (StepWise) Online In this course will desribe how to upload Account Groups, Accounting Identities and Accounting Setups into Infor M3.
Infor: Using the Payroll - Accounts Payable Interface Online Using the Payroll-Accounts Payable Interface is a 27-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn the key setup and processing steps to successfully utilize this interface.
Infor: Using the Project Database (StepWise) Online Designed for all implementation team members, this course details the database initial request, set-up and use within the project.
Infor: Using the Solution Description (StepWise) Online This course provides a description and the purpose of the Solution description and its role in the sales account transition meeting.
Infor: Using the Talent Management to Human Resources Management Interface Online This course describes the prerequisite setup and processing steps to interface data from Infor Talent Management to Infor Human Resources Management.
ION Business Vault: Analytic Modeling Troubleshooting Online This course provides information on how to troubleshoot the analytic modeling functions in the Business Vault. The course will cover what to do if an import process fails. You will learn how to interpret the results of publication and validation processes by reviewing the process report. You will learn how to troubleshoot a failed publication.
ION Business Vault: BI Solutions Overview from Source to Analytics Online This session provides a BI solutions overview from the source systems through the ION Technology applications to Infor BI Analytics. It highlights the ION Business Vault filling the gaps between BODs and BI Analytics.
ION Business Vault: Defining Cubes Online This session teaches you how to define an analysis cube. Cubes provide a basis for performing multi-dimensional analysis of business data (e.g, sales, finance, production etc). Cube definitions are used to combine dimensions and measures into a cube structure. You'll learn how to associate fact transactions with dimensions. This course also provides a more in-depth look on how to build your fact views. Fact views are a structured organization of transactions like sales orders, invoices, and GL balances. Facts provide the quantitative values for measure values and KPIs.
ION Business Vault: Defining Level-based Hierarchies Online This session teaches you how to define a level-based hierarchy. You'll learn what a level-based hierarchy is and how to setup levels, setup attributes and filter for specific data. You'll learn how to setup special members to fill in the data gaps for missing values and unknown values. You'll preview the hierarchy and create a dimension from the hierarchy.
ION Business Vault: Defining Manual Hierarchies Online This session teaches you how to define a manual hierarchy. You'll learn how to setup the hierarchy structure, setup attributes and specify attribute values. You'll add the hierarchy to a dimension and publish it to a target.
ION Business Vault: Defining Preconfigured Dimensions Online This session provides advanced instructions on how to setup and use preconfigured dimensions. A preconfigured dimension is a special type of dimension. Most of the settings are defined behind-the-scenes using stored procedures and configurations setup in the Business Vault. The person using a preconfigured dimension simply selects parameters to use for the dimension.
ION Business Vault: Defining Range-based Hierarchies Online This session teaches you how to define a manual hierarchy specifically for range-based, or categorized, buckets. You'll learn how to setup the hierarchy structure, setup a range attribute and specify range values. You'll add the hierarchy to a dimension, incorporate the dimension in a cube and publish it to a target.
ION Business Vault: Defining Rule-based Hierarchies Online This session teaches you how to define a rule-based hierarchy. You'll learn how to setup the hierarchy structure, setup attributes and filter for specific data. You'll learn how to assign lowest-level members to the hierarchy using direct assignments or rules. You'll create a new dimension from the hierarchy.
ION Business Vault: Defining Standard Dimensions Online This session provides instructions to define a standard dimension for use in multi-dimensional analysis cubes. You'll learn how to design a dimension, create attributes, incorporate hierarchies for the dimension and define subsets.
ION Business Vault: Foundation Online ARCHIVED 6/12/14    This course provides an overview of the ION Business Vault application.
ION Business Vault: General Troubleshooting Online This course provides information on how to troubleshoot the Business Vault. You will learn where to access the Business Vault logs, how to start and stop the Business Vault UI and Runtime Services and where to access version information.
ION Business Vault: Implementing the Solution Online This course explores the implementation of ION Business Vault, from either an installation or upgrade, and the connections made to a SQL Server database.
ION Business Vault: Import and Export Functionality Online This course walks you through how to import and export hierarchy, dimension and cube definitions and associated model objects. The primary purpose of the import and export functionality is to copy definitions from one Infor ION Business Vault to another.
ION Business Vault: Installing and Configuring ION Business Vault 11.1 Online This course walks you through a basic installation of Infor ION Business Vault 11.1. It also walks you through an upgrade of Business Vault to version 11.1. The course provides additional tips on how to setup Business Vault security in Infor Federaion Services.
ION Business Vault: Mapping and Customizing BODs Online This course provides a closer look at working with business object documents (BODs), including: a BOD mapping overview, the BOD Mapping Generator Wizard, localization of BOD mappings, understanding XPath constructs used by BOD mappings, configuring specialized BOD mappings with keywords, and configuring custom BODs.
ION Business Vault: Modeling Multi-Language Cubes and Dimensions Online This training provides instructions to setup and publish cubes, dimensions and hierarchies in multiple languages. Learn how to setup the cubes, dimension and hierarchy definitions to contain multi-lingual data. Learn how to configure publication targets to publish data in multiple locales.
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - Architectural Overview Online ARCHIVED 6/2/14     This session will give an overview of the architecture of Infor10 Reporting for Business Vault Operational Reports. In this session we will start with the data coming from the source systems and follow it as it makes its way to the end user. This session will include an overview of Infor10 Security, Infor10 Business Vault and Infor10 Workspace.
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - General Ledger Domain Online ARCHIVED 6/2/14     This session provides a overview of pre-built content for the business domain. An overview of the model and reports for each domain will be provided.  
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - Purchasing Domain Online ARCHIVED 6/2/14     This session provides a overview of pre-built content for the business domain. An overview of the model and reports for each domain will be provided. 
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - Report Authoring (Part 1) Online ARCHIVED 6/2/14      These sessions will cover report authoring using the Infor templates and standards. Report authoring utilitizes Cognos Report Studio, which is available to the Infor10 Reporting Professional Author role. Pre-requisite: II-315 c
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - Report Authoring (Part 2) Online ARCHIVED 3/2/14    These sessions will cover report authoring using the Infor templates and standards. Report authoring utilitizes Cognos Report Studio, which is available to the Infor10 Reporting Professional Author role. Pre-requisites: II-314 a
ION Business Vault: Operational Reports - Report Authoring (Part 3) Online ARCHIVED 6/2/14    These sessions will cover report authoring using the Infor templates and standards. Report authoring utilitizes Cognos Report Studio, which is available to the Infor10 Reporting Professional Author role. Pre-requisites: II-314 b
ION Business Vault: Operations Online This course describes how to use ION Business Vault in your day-to-day operations, including theDocument Trace feature, data store management, the Replays feature, and error management.
ION Business Vault: Product Overview Online This session provides a general overview of Infor ION Business Vault application and navigation. It walks you through some of the key features included in the Business Vault.
ION Business Vault: Publishing Dimensions and Cubes Online This course shows you how to define, validate, publish dimension and cube information to a target analysis application such as Infor BI OLAP Server. You’ll define a publication definition that contains the setup instructions on what to publish and where to publish. You’ll validate the publication to ensure that the definitions and data are valid for the target application. Publications may be run on-demand or on a schedule. You’ll learn how to view the status and results of a validation or publication process using the publication monitor.
ION Business Vault: Setting Up Analytic Modeling Online This is an introductory course on how to setup analytic modeling in the ION Business Vault. Understand at a high level the setup steps to setup users with IFS security roles for modeling, setup source database connections with models, import content and setup publication targets for publishing to a target analysis application.
ION Business Vault: Setting Up Database Connections and Models Online This course explains how to setup database connections and models in Infor ION Business Vault.
ION Business Vault: Using Properties and Maintaining Custom Model Objects Online This session provides information on how to use the properties pane and the entities prompt in the definitions. The session includes information on how to maintain custom model objects for property and entity aliases, custom properties, custom entities and relationships that are stored in custom models.
ION: Configuration Online The purpose of this course is to explain how to configure Infor ION after installation. It describes how to do user and database management, to start or stop ION, to handle authorizations, to deploy ION for multiple hosts or SSL and other configuration for ION. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Connect Management and Troubleshooting Online The purpose of this course is to explain how to manage and troubleshoot Infor ION Connect. It shows how you can check the status of a running ION, how to see what happened to BOD messages that were published and how to handle exceptions. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Desk Authorizations Online The purpose of this course is to show how to set up authorizations for ION Desk, which is the modeling and management tool for Infor ION. It explains the concepts such as roles, profiles and permissions, and explains how to configure the authorizations. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Installation Online The purpose of this course is to explain how to do a new installation of Infor ION. It provides the steps needed to prepare and run the installation. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Introduction to ION Connect Online The purpose of this course is to provide a general introduction to Infor ION Connect. It explains the goals and concepts of ION Connect, the available connectors, and gives an overview of the modeling and management of ION Connect using ION Desk. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Introduction to ION Suite - Trial Online Deactivated - The purpose of this course is to provide a general introduction to Infor ION. It explains the goals of the product and includes an overview of the components, such as ION Connect, ION Workflow and ION Event Management. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Introduction to ION Workflow Online The purpose of this course is to provide a general introduction to Infor ION Workflow. It explains the goals and concepts of ION Workflow, gives an overview of how to model and how to start a workflow and how to deal with user tasks and notifications. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Introduction to the ION Suite Online The purpose of this course is to provide a general introduction to Infor ION. It explains the goals of the product and includes an overview of the components, such as ION Connect, ION Workflow and ION Event Management. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Setup Online The purpose of this course is to explain how to set up an environment before installing Infor ION. It shows which components are installed and which platforms and versions are needed to run these components. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ION: Solution Design and Administration Classroom This course covers the vision, concepts and basic usage of the ION elements of the technology stack. It will cover the core concepts and the basic creation/usage of various ION components including connection points, document flows, monitors, workflows as well as basic administration tasks including OneView. This training is for version(s): 11.x versions, although much applies to previous 10.x versions. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
ION: Workflow Exit Points Online The purpose of this course is to explain how to use workflow exit points in Infor ION. It shows the background of workflow exit points and explains how to create and use a workflow exit point. This training is applicable for Infor ION version 11.0.
ISM: v4.10 Application Presentation - Part 1 Online Includes Misc. Purchases, Calculated Columns, Package Tracking, Bank Reconciliation Report, Spell Check, and Contract Line Accounting.
ISM: v4.10 Application Presentation - Part 3 Online AIA Billing
ISM: v4.20 Application Presentation - Part 1 Online Extended Unit Owner History, Auto Create Loaner Warehouse, Customer PO Visibility, DataView Layout Management, User Definable Appointment Hovers, Vendor Return Improvements, Serial Tracking Improvements, Service Demand Consumption Options
ISM: v4.20 Application Presentation - Part 2 Online BOD Integration Overview for Service Management as a Point Solution
ISM: v4.20 Visual Integration Online Demonstration highlighting a simple flow of the point-to-point VISUAL and ISM integration.
ISM: v5.0 Application Overview Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate new features introduced in Infor Service Management version 5.00. This is a 25 minute self-paced e-Learning course.
ISM: v5.0 BI - Configuring a BI OLAP Environment Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how an administrator can configure an ISM BI OLAP environment. This self-paced 8-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 BI - Creating BI Dashboards Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to create dashboard widgets with Application Studio report designer. This self-paced 9-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 BI - Cubes Overview Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how data modeler can be used to create multi-dimensional cubes. This self-paced 18-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 BI - Interacting with BI Using Office Plus Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how an end user can interact with BI data elements using Office Plus. This self-paced 18-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 BI - Modifying BI Dashboards Online The purpose of this course is to demonstrate how to modify dashboard widgets with Application Studio report designer. This self-paced 8-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00
ISM: v5.0 BI - Overview Online ISM BI dashboards provide high-level views of KPIs for particular objectives and business processes. Using a browser, charts and gauges can be drilled into in a variety of ways to allow the user to perform analysis on the underlying data. This self-paced 40-minute course is applicable in ISM BI v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 Infor Portal Foundation Online Service Portal allows Customers, Vendors and Employees to create Incidents and search the Knowledge Base for solutions. Service Partners can enter SRO Transactions. Customers can verify their account status.
ISM: v5.0 Managing Rental Inventory Online Managing Rental Inventory in ISM 5.0
ISM: v5.0 Portals Overview Online ISM Portals provides access to certain service data via browser for your customers and partners. Portal Users can review Incidents and Knowledge Base Entries, and can enter New Incidents, and Requests to Register a Unit. Portal Users who are partners can also review SROs and enter Transactions as work is performed. This self-paced 40-minute course is applicable in ISM Portals v5.00.
ISM: v5.0 Setting Up Contracts Online Infor Service Management V5.0 Rental Contract Setup, with the Rental Counter, Supplemental Items, Item Availability and Time Phased Rental Inventory
ISM: v5.0 Using the Rental Counter Online Using the Rental Counter in ISM 5.0
Lawson SCM: Implementing the Bidding Process Online
Implementing the Bidding Process is a two-hour OnDemand course for supply chain and procurement professionals and managers. Attendees will learn about the applications included in the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management Suite and their capabilities, the Bidding business process, and how the SCM applications facilitate this process.
Lawson SCM: Introducing the Supply Chain Management Suite Online
This course is a two-hour OnDemand course for supply chain and procurement professionals and managers. Attendees will learn about the applications included in the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management Suite and their capabilities.
Lawson SCM: Replenishing Inventory Online
This is a two-hour OnDemand course for supply chain and procurement professionals and managers. Attendees will learn about the applications included in the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management Suite and their capabilities, the Inventory Replenishment business process, and how the SCM applications facilitate this process.
Lawson SCM: Requesting an Inventory Item Online With Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management you can effectively and efficiently manage your procurement processes. This two-hour OnDemand course provides an overview of the Supply Chain Management suite of applications and their capabilities, and an exploration of the Request an Inventory Item business process. The course also provides opportunities to try simulations of procedures used in the Request an Inventory Item process.
Lawson SCM: Requesting an Order Using Order Entry Online
Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management: Order Request using Order Entry is a two-hour OnDemand course for supply chain and procurement professionals and managers. Attendees will learn about the applications included in the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management Suite and their capabilities, the Order Request using Order Entry business process, and how the SCM applications facilitate this process.
Lawson SCM: Using Requisition to Check Online This is a two-hour OnDemand course for supply chain and procurement professionals and managers. Attendees will learn about the applications included in the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management Suite and their capabilities, the Requisition to Check business process, and how the SCM applications facilitate this process.
Lawson: Accessing Lawson Data for Crystal Reports Classroom Lawson: Accessing Lawson Data for Crystal Reports is a course that teaches the attendee how to reference Lawson database files and field names during the report creation process while at the same time maintaining  security. This is a two-day instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Accessing Lawson Data for Crystal/VACDATCR.
Lawson: Accounts Payable Tax Introduction Online Accounts Payable Tax Introduction is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Business Analysts, and Accounts Payable End Users. Attendees will learn tax terminology, how to setup the tax application, and how to process taxable invoices for both matching and expense invoices.
Lawson: Administering AP Invoice Automation Classroom This course covers the knowledge and skills an administrator would need to manage the Lawson AP Invoice Automation (APIA) application including—but not limited to—setup tasks such as uploading resources, assigning security classes to roles, assigning roles to actors, creating finance groups, invoice assignment rules, invoice approval codes, and invoice routing rules.
The course will also familiarize the administrator with knowledge to support end-user role tasks including processing an invoice through its lifecycle, generating reports, and utilities for troubleshooting APIA.
This training is for versions: Lawson AP Invoice Automation version 10.1.1 and all previous versions. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Administering Landmark Foundation Classroom This course provides the technical fundamentals needed for understanding Landmark System and Applications. It also provides Landmark administrators with knowledge about tasks associated with effective implementation and maintenance of Landmark, and hands-on practice in performing these tasks.
This course will include the new features and enhancements in the 10.1 release of Lawson Landmark Technology including upgrade considerations, server environment changes, database changes, security changes, and Infor Process Automation changes.
This training is for version(s): Infor Landmark 10.x and later releases. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Administering Smart Office Classroom This course provides the fundamentals needed for understanding Smart Office. It also provides Lawson administrators with knowledge about tasks associated with effective implementation and maintenance of Smart Office. This training is for version(s) : 10.x and all previous versions. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Administering System Foundation for System i Classroom Administrating System Foundations for System i is a course for Lawson Administrators working with Foundation and Administration of Lawson System Foundation components. Attendees will learn  to effectively implement and maintain Lawson on System i. Previous course name/code: Lawson System Foundation & Administration for System i
Lawson: Administration for Business Intelligence Classroom Administration for Business Intelligence is a course for technical consultants, partners, client LBI administrators, and client system administrators. Attendees will learn how to administer the Business Intelligence solution. Only applicable to Lawson application customers. Note: Using Business Intelligence is a pre-requisite to the Administration for Business Intelligence class. Previous course name/code: Lawson Business Intelligence Administration, 9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: AP Invoice Automation Highlights Online Learn how Infor Lawson AP Invoice Automation benefits organizations by helping to simplify invoice review and approval and reduce processing costs while providing faster access to more complete information about invoices and their dispensation.
Lawson: Balancing Inventory Control to the General Ledger Online This course covers the reports and online programs that balance month end amounts posted from Inventory Control to the General Ledger.
Lawson: Balancing Month End Online Attendees will learn the month end procedures for Accounts Payable, Asset Management, Accounts Receivable, Project and Activity Accounting, and General Ledger.
Lawson: Behind the Scenes of General Ledger Online This course explains what take place during the General Ledger transaction processing cycle, from entry and interface to posting and period close. 
Lawson: BSI TaxFactory - Advanced Online BSI TaxFactory - Advanced is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Business Analysts, and Programmers. Attendees will explore the more advanced tools and features provided by this BSI product.
Lawson: Budgeting Positions and Jobs Online Budgeting Positions and Jobs is a 41-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn about the functionality available in Personnel Administration to define and maintain budgets by job or position. 
Lawson: Building a Dashboard Online How to Build a Dashboard is a 1-hour course for Account Executives, Consultants (Business, IS, Support, Technical), and Project Managers. Attendees will learn the basics of building a dashboard within Framework Services.
Lawson: Business Intelligence Introduction Online Lawson Business Intelligence Overview is a 20-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support, Technical), Managers (Client Account, Implementation, Project), Project Leads, Business Analysts, and Account Executives. Attendees will learn the components, purpose, and benefits of the Lawson Business Intelligence suite. Applicable only to Lawson application customers.
Lawson: Capitalizing Assets Using Project and Activity Accounting Online Capitalizing Assets Using Project and Activity Accounting is a 75-minute course for Accounting Managers, Accountants, Senior Accountants Asset Accounts, Project Managers, and System Analysts. Attendees will learn  how to capitalize a project or a piece of equipment using the Project Accounting module.
Lawson: Cash Ledger - Basics Online Explore the cash ledger functionality to process cash ledger cycle.
Lawson: Closing Lawson Sub-systems and the General Ledger Online Closing Lawson Sub-systems and the General Ledger is a 60-minute course for Controllers, Accounting Managers, Accountants, Senior Accountants, and System Analysts. Attendees will learn how to process the closing of a general ledger and sub-system period close.
Lawson: Comparing Project & Activity Accounting to General Ledger Online This course explains the similarities and differences between Project Accounting and the General Ledger. 
Lawson: Configuration Console Overview Online In this course, you will learn more about the Configuration Console, an application that allows you to customize certain elements of Infor Lawson and Infor Talent Management applications.
Lawson: Configuring a Lawson/Oracle Interface Online Configuring a Lawson/Oracle Interface is a 77-minute course for Consultants and System Administrators. Attendees will learn the steps needed to configure the Lawson Environment for storing data in an Oracle database.  
Lawson: Copying a Productline in System Foundation Technology Online Copying a Productline in System Foundation Technology is a 30-minute course for Lawson System Administrators. Attendees will learn  how to copy a productline. 

Lawson: Creating a Blanket Agreement Online Create a Blanket Agreement is a 12-minute course for Consultants (Application, Support). Attendees will learn basics of defining a basic blanket vendor price agreement.
Lawson: Creating Custom Transaction Reports in General Ledger Online This course explains the reporting tools that you can use to create customized General Ledger transaction reports.

Lawson: Creating Custom Triggers for Infor Process Automation Online This course introduces the purpose of and procedures for creating custom triggers for Infor Process Automation. The course covers custom triggers for both the Infor Landmark and Infor Lawson applications. This training is for version(s): 10.1.0 and all previous versions.
Lawson: Creating Purchase Orders Online This course explains how to create and manage purchase orders.
Lawson: Design Studio - Basics Online This course provides an overview of Design Studio and explains the three Design Studio design tools: UI Designer, Portal Page Designer, and Wizard Designer.
Lawson: Entering Accounts Payable Expense Invoices Online Entering Accounts Payable Expense Invoices presents the key components required for basic Accounts Payable (AP) expense invoice processing.
Lawson: Entering and Matching Invoices Online This course explains concepts and procedures related to entering and matching invoices to the Lawson Invoice Matching application.
Lawson: Enterprise Financial Management Differences 9.0 - 9.0.1 Online This course presents and explains the new key features in the 9.0.1 release of Enterprise Finance Management.
Lawson: Exam for Lawson System Foundation 9 Administration UNIX Online
The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics: Lawson Server Configuration and Administration, Maintaining the Lawson System, Security, Lawson Portal Administration, Job and Environment Resources Setup, Product Line Maintenance / Defining Customer Form IDs, Maintaining the UNIX Operating System, LDAP, WebSphere.
This exam is applicable to version 9.0. This is a timed, two-hour long exam.
You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
duration: self-paced
Lawson: Exam for Lawson System Foundation 9 Administration Windows Online
The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics: Lawson Server Configuration and Administration, Maintaining the Lawson System, Security, Lawson Portal Administration, Job and Environment Resources Setup, Product Line Maintenance / Defining Customer Form IDs, Maintain the Windows Operating System, LDAP / ADAM, WebSphere.
This exam is applicable to version 9.0. This is a timed, two-hour long exam.
You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
Duration: Self-paced
Lawson: Exam for v10 Lawson System Foundation Administration for UNIX Online The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics: Lawson System 10 architecture and directory structure, maintenance of Infor Lawson servers, system processing and job processes, applying product installation or updates/maintenance releases/patches, Infor Landmark Technology Runtime for Infor Process Automation, IBM WebSphere - user administration with Infor Security Services, Lawson LDAP, Infor Ming.le™ Foundation, and Infor Lawson for Ming.le™, and Infor Lawson Security administration. This exam is applicable to version 10.0. This is a timed, one-hour long exam. You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
Lawson: Exam for v10 Lawson System Foundation Administration for Windows Online The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics: Lawson System 10 architecture and directory structure, maintenance of Infor Lawson servers, system processing and job processes, applying product installation or updates/maintenance releases/patches, Infor Landmark Technology Runtime for Infor Process Automation, IBM WebSphere - user administration with Infor Security Services, Lawson LDAP, Infor Ming.le™ Foundation, and Infor Lawson for Ming.le™, and Infor Lawson Security administration. This exam is applicable to version 10.0. This is a timed, 1.25-hour long exam. You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
Lawson: Fast and Convenient with Infor Lawson Mobile Assets Online Fast and Convenient with Infor Lawson Mobile Assets helps organizations quickly look up assets, perform inventory, and update asset information through mobile devices. This mobile application provides mapping of locations and barcode scanning for easier inventory and higher accuracy. With its enhanced user experience and centralized Lawson security, Mobile Assets makes accessing your asset information faster and easier.
Lawson: Financial Report Writer - Introduction Online This course explains major concepts in setting up and using the financial report writer to generate financial and managerial reports.
Lawson: Financials Simulations for Healthcare Organizations Online The Enterprise Financial Management Simulations for Healthcare Organizations is a 12-hour course for End Users, Power Users, and Support Staff of Lawson Enterprise Financial Management applications. Attendees will learn best practices for Healthcare Organizations using Lawson business processes.
Lawson: Financials Simulations for Public Sector Organizations Online Enterprise Financial Management Simulations for Public Sector Organizations is a 7-hour course for End Users, Power Users and Support Staff of Lawson Enterprise Financial Management applications. Attendees will learn best practices for Public Sector Organizations using Lawson business processes.
Lawson: General Ledger Allocations Introduction Online This course explains how to create allocations and automatically dispense posted balances between accounts in the General Ledger and Budgeting applications.
Lawson: General Ledger Budgeting Introduction Online General Ledger Budgeting Introduction is a 45-minute course that introduces creating, reporting, and maintaining a General Ledger budget.
Lawson: General Ledger Rebuilds Introduction Online General Ledger Rebuilds is a half-hour course for Consultants (Application, Support, Technical). Attendees will learn to recognize when the rebuilds are necessary and how to effectively use the rebuild programs.
Lawson: Getting Started with BSI Setup Online Getting Started with BSI Setup is a 60-minute course for customers who work with Infor Human Resource and Payroll applications. Attendees will learn tax factory and the requirements needed to automate tax deduction assignment.
Lawson: Getting Started with Portal Online Learn how to use the Lawson Portal interface to access Lawson applications.
Lawson: Implementing Employee & Manager Self-Service Classroom Implementing Employee & Manager Self-Service, is a course for HR end-users and implementation leaders. Attendees will learn the key concepts and procedures for successful implementation and maintenance of Employee and Manager Self-Service. This course is a three-day, instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Implement Employee & Manager Self-Service, 8.1/9.0
Lawson: Implementing Grant Management Classroom Implementing Grant Management is a course about how to build and process grant data and reinforce the key implementation considerations using hands-on exercises.Previous course name/code: Implement Grant Management, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Implementing with SQL Server 2008 for DBAs Classroom Lawson: Implementing with SQL Server 2008 for DBAs is a 2-day course for Data Managers. Attendees will learn the initial set-up, implementation, and on-going technical management of the Lawson product suite(s), and their connectivity to the Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Relational Database Management System. Previous course name/code: Lawson & SQL Server 2005 DBA 2 days/SQLBA05.
Lawson: Infor Lawson Mobile Financials at Your Fingertips Online Infor Lawson Mobile Financials helps finance and accounting staff quickly research and get status on account balances, invoices, and payments through their mobile devices. Designed specifically to work with Infor Lawson Financials, the mobile application allow users to review and approve invoices in accounts payable, review open customer invoices and related payments, and also lookup and review customer details and history. Mobile Financials allows users on-demand access to financial information at a mobile convenience.
Lawson: Introduction to Smart Office Classroom The Smart Office Introduction course explores how to use the main features and functionality of Smart Office. This course uses the Lawson application. Previous course name/code: Lawson Smart Office Introduction/VSOINTRO. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Introduction to Smart Office Online This course introduces the purpose, benefits, and functionality of Smart Office for Lawson. The course covers navigation and personalization of the Smart Office interface, as well as its use as a tool for increasing efficiency in querying. This training is for version(s): 10.1.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Lawson S3 Smart Office Introduction.
Lawson: Invoice Matching Introduction Online This course explains a high level overview of concepts related to the Lawson Invoice Matching application.
Lawson: Item Attributes Introduction Online Item Attributes covers the value of attributes, defining attributes, and how to use attributes in the Lawson Procurement Application.
Lawson: Maintaining Mobile Supply Chain Management Online Maintaining Mobile Supply Chain Management is a 45-minute course for Consultants (Application, Support, Technical), Implementation Managers, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn  how to administer the Mobile Supply Chain Management (MSCM) System.
Lawson: Maintaining the Match Process Classroom Lawson: Maintaining the Match Process is a 3-hour course for Consultants (Application, Support), Project Leads, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn about reports, inquiries, and archival processes that help with monitoring and maintaining match processes. Previous course name/code: Monitor and Maintain the Match Process 8.1/9.0/MNTMTCHPROC8190.
Lawson: Making AP Payments with an Electronic File or ACH Tape Online AP Payments Made Via an Electronic File or ACH Tape is a 90-minute course for Lawson customers and partners who work with Lawson Accounts Payable Applications. Attendees will learn how to set up and run payment cycles in order to create these Electronic Files or ACH Tapes.
Lawson: Managing Billing and Revenue Classroom Managing Billing and Revenue, is a course for Project Leaders, Customer Service Managers, Billing/Credit Managers, AR Supervisors, and MIS. Attendees will learn about the invoice life cycle beginning with invoice inception (entry or interface) and ending with the transfer of the invoice to the Accounts Receivable system for payment. Previous course name/code: Billing and Revenue Management, 8.1/9.0
Lawson: Mobile Par and Cycle Count - Introduction Online Mobile Par and Cycle Count - Introduction is a 1-hour course that  explains setup and processing using the feature of Par Counting, Cycle Counting, and Pick for Par.
Lawson: Ontology - Introduction Online This course explains the design and structure of data in applications developed with Landmark technology.
Lawson: Optimizing Employee Groups Online Optimizing Employee Groups is a half-hour course for Consultants and Project Managers. Attendees will learn setup and naming convention recommendations.
Lawson: Portal Administration - Advanced Online Portal Administration – Advanced is a half-hour course that explores and demonstrates advanced features within Portal Administration.
Lawson: Portal Administration Differences 3.x - 9.0 Online Lawson Portal Administration, 3.x to 9.0 Differences is a 1-hour course for Consultants, Programmers, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn the differences between the Lawson Portal, 9.0 and earlier Portal versions.
Lawson: Posting Summary and Detail Journal Entries Online Lawson: Posting Summary and Detail Journal Entries is a 33-minute course for Consultants, Managers, and Project Leads. Attendees will learn what needs to take place for a transaction to be summarized.
Lawson: Process Automation Differences Classroom Process Automation Differences is a course for clients, partners and employees who have previously taken the ProcessFlow Integrator and want to learn Process Automation. Attendees will learn the differences between the ProcessFlow Integrator and Process Automation Designers and Administration setup and maintenance. Previous course name/code: Process Automation/ProcessFlow Integrator Differences/LPAPFIDIFF
Lawson: ProcessFlow - Basics Online ProcessFlow Basics is a 1-hour course. Attendees will learn about the ProcessFlow product features, components, functionality, and benefits.
Lawson: Processing Accounts Payable Invoices Online This course demonstrates how to optimize Accounts Payable setup and streamline day-to-day processing.
Lawson: Processing Accounts Payable Payments Online This course explains how to use Accounts Payable to generate payment and complete each phase of Cash Payment Cycle.
Lawson: Processing Accounts Receivable Online Lawson: Processing Accounts Receivable is a 15-minute course that illustrates the cash entry process and applications on the AR30 screens.
Lawson: Processing Bids Online Processing Bids is a 21-minute recorded presentation that outlines the process of bid processing.
Lawson: Processing Currency with General Ledger Online Processing Currency with General Ledger explores currency setup and processing within General Ledger.
Lawson: Processing General Ledger Year-end Procedures Online Processing General Ledger Year-end Procedures is a 45-minute course that explores year-end closing considerations in General Ledger.
Lawson: Processing Manual Payments Online Processing Manual Payments in is a 40-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn basic procedures for processing manual payments using the core Manual Payment (PR80.1) functionality.
Lawson: Processing Par Cart Online This course is about  par replenishment processing. Attendees will learn how to create, process, and maintain cart, par locations.
Lawson: Processing Payroll Classroom Processing Payroll is a course for Payroll Staff involved in implementation or ongoing processes. Attendees will learn to effectively process payroll cycles for employees working in U.S., including troubleshooting payroll cycle issues, entering manual adjustments and payments, balancing, and regulatory reporting. Previous course name/code: Payroll Processing U/S., 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Processing U.S. Garnishments Online This course demonstrates the necessary set up needed to accurately process U.S. garnishments in Infor Human Resource and Payroll applications.
Lawson: Processing Vendor Returns Online Archived - 5-6-14 Processing Vendor Returns is a 1-hour course for Consultants, Business Analysts, and Programmers. Attendees will learn the steps in processing vendor returns, monitoring returns, and processing credit memos against a return.
Lawson: Processing Web Time Entry Online Processing Web Time Entry is a 30-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support) and Project Managers. Attendees will learn the step-by-step flow of web time records, from initial entry by employees in Employee Self Service through the final preparation of the records for a payroll cycle.
Lawson: Procurement Transactions Impact on General Ledger Online Procurement Transactions Impact on General Ledger is a 15-minute, two-part presentation on Procurement Transaction impact on General Ledger.
Lawson: Publishing Back Office Reports Online Publishing Back Office Reports is a 45-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, IS, Support, Technical), Business Analysts, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn the  basic concepts relating to publishing and bursting of back office reports in Reporting Services.
Lawson: Receiving and Delivery Introduction Online Receiving and Delivery Introduction provides a half-hour overview of the Receiving and Delivery solution.
Lawson: Report Writer for General Ledger Classroom Report Writer for General Ledger is a course about how to access, analyze, and distribute information from the General Ledger with the Lawson Report Writer application. Previous course name/code: Report Writer for General Ledger, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Resource Management Introduction Online Resource Management Introduction is a 45-minute course. Attendees will learn about the main features of Resource Management: adding people, organization, or thing resources; setting up resource roles; and adding location maps and structure trees.
Lawson: Scorecard Introduction Online Scorecard Introduction is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Project Leads, Project Managers, and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn the purpose and benefits of the Lawson Scorecard component of Lawson Business Intelligence.
Lawson: Securing Data and Reports in Enterprise Reporting Online Securing Data and Reports in Enterprise Reporting is a 50-minute course that describes the various ways in which data and reports are secured in Enterprise Reporting.
Lawson: Security Introduction Online This course provides an overview of the Lawson Security authorization engine, shows examples of creating rules, and demonstrates how to start preparing an organization to create rules-based security policies that can be implemented in Lawson Security architecture.
Lawson: Setting Up and Processing Billing Online Setting Up and Processing Billing is a 1-hour course that describes the process of setting up billing parameters as well as going through processing method for your project.
Lawson: Setting Up Contract and Revenue Recognition Online Review how to set up contracts and revenue recognition using Lawson's Billing and Revenue Management software, part of the Lawson Financials Suite.
Lawson: Setting up Oracle UNIX & NT Environments Classroom Lawson: Setting up Oracle UNIX & NT Environments is a three-day course for database managers. Attendees will learn the initial setup, implementation, and ongoing technical management of the Lawson Environment with the Oracle Relational Database Management System. Previous course name/code: Oracle Setup and Tools, Unix/NT Environment/ORACLE.
Lawson: Setting Up Project and Activity Accounting Online Setting Up Project and Activity Accounting is a 2-hour course for Customers and Partners who work with the Lawson Project and Activity Accounting application. Attendees will learn how to process the year end close within the Payroll application.
Lawson: Setting Up the Human Resources Structure Classroom Setting up the Human Resources Structure course is for HR Implementation Project Teams. Attendees  will learn basic setup as well as structures for pay, deduction, garnishment, and various employee groups  and structures. Previous course name/code: Human Resources Structure, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Setting Up the Security Environment for Financial Users Online Setting Up the Security Environment for Financial Users covers the basics of defining environment security parameters for Lawson users.
Lawson: Stale Dating and Escheatment of an Accounts Payable Check Online Stale Dating and Escheatment of an Accounts Payable Check is a 15-minute course for Accounting Managers, Accounts Payable Supervisor, and Accounts Payable Specialists. Attendees will learn how to process accounts payable checks for stale dating and escheatment.
Lawson: System Foundation Differences 9.x - 10.x Classroom This course explains the differences between versions 9.0.1 and 10 for Lawson System Foundation & Administration. Previous course name/code: Lawson System Foundation 9.0 Administration Differences.Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Technology Differences 8.0.3 - 9.0 Online This is a course for Consultants, Project Managers, Project Leads, Business Analysts, Programmers, and System Administrators. Attendees will receive a broad, descriptive overview of the differences between the Lawson 8.0.3 and 9.0 Technology versions.
Lawson: Training Administration Introduction Online This course explains the setup of training options and curriculum, along with the key processing steps in the Training Administration application.
Lawson: Upgrading LSF 9.0.0 to 9.0.1 Online Upgrading LSF 9.0.0 - 9.0.1 is a 20-minute course for Consultants (Business, IS, Support, Technical), Project Managers, and System Administrators. Attendees will receive a high-level overview of the 64-bit Binary Release for LSF 9.0.1. 
Lawson: Uploading Personnel Actions Online Demonstrate the workaround steps to upload personnel actions using Lawson Add-ins for Microsoft Office.
Lawson: Using a Report Writer Report as a Crystal Data Source Online This course demonstrates how to use a General Ledger Report Writer report as a data source for a Crystal report.
Lawson: Using Absence Management Classroom Using Absence Management is a course for HR Implementation Project Teams and Absence  Management End Users. Attendees will learn how configure and manage time-off policies, such as  vacation, illness, and FMLA. Previous course name/code: Absence Management, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Accounts Payable Classroom This course covers foundational instruction on Infor Lawson Accounts Payable. This training is for version 10.0.x and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Accounts Payable/AP9081. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Accounts Receivable Classroom Using Accounts Receivable is a course for Credit Manager and Cash Application Supervisors. Attendees  will learn about cash entry and application, electronic funds transfer, deduction reporting, tax processing,  cashbook, currency exchange, and credit management. Previous course name/code: Accounts Receivable, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using and Administering Business Intelligence Classroom This course introduces you to information and practice needed to perform Business Intelligence foundation and administration functions within the Lawson system. This training is applicable to Lawson Business Intelligence 10.0.0. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Application Development Workbench/CASE for UNIX and NT Classroom This is a five-day course for Program Developers. Attendees will learn to build custom tables to update the Lawson database and/or build a custom database with custom programs (reports and on-line screens) that read and update that database. Previous course name/code: UNIX® and NT Application Development Workbench - CASE/UXNTCASE. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Application Maintenance Toolset Online Using Application Maintenance Toolset is a 30-minute course that looks at Lawson's application patching process called Application Maintenance Toolset, which works with the CTP's (Critical Transfer Packages).
Lawson: Using Applied CASE and Design Studio Online Using Applied CASE and Design Studio is a 20-minute course for Programmers, Developers and Consultants. Attendees will learn the Lawson CASE and Design Studio tools (along with Developer's Workbench tools and skills), and use them to develop a realistic but hypothetical example form that combines data originally shown on two separate Lawson standard forms.
Lawson: Using Asset Management Classroom Using Asset Management is a course for Asset Management End Users. Attendees will learn system setup, asset additions, adjustments, transfers, disposals, depreciation, as well as additional Asset Management features. Previous course name/code: Asset Management, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Asset Templates and Combine Codes Online Asset Templates and Combine Codes is a 1-hour course for Customers and Partners who work with Lawson Financial Applications. Attendees will learn how to add assets within the Asset Management application.
Lawson: Using Attribute Matrix with General Ledger Online This course explains how Attribute Matrix is used with accounts, accounting units, and transactions to increase reporting and inquiry capabilities in the system.
Lawson: Using Attributes in Accounts Receivable Online Using Attributes in Accounts Receivable is a 1-hour course that explores the use of attributes (from the Attribute Matrix, MX, application) within the Accounts Receivable application.
Lawson: Using Benefits Administration Classroom Using Benefits Administration is a course for Lawson Benefits Administration Users (Including Flex and Non-Flex End Users). Attendees will learn the definition of flex and benefit plans, automation rules to improve processing efficiency, and employee enrollment and maintenance. They will also learn to process benefit records for retirees and U.S. COBRA participants. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Billing Classroom Using Billing, is a course for Project Leaders, Customer Service Managers, Billing/Credit Managers, AR Supervisors, and MIS. Attendees will learn about the invoice life cycle beginning with invoice inception (entry or interface) and ending with the transfer of the invoice to the Accounts Receivable system for payment. Previous course name/code: Billing, 8.1/9.0
Lawson: Using Business Intelligence Classroom Using Business Intelligence enables learners to develop solutions to operational business intelligence needs with the core, integrated products of Business Intelligence. Previous course name/code: Lawson Business Intelligence Foundations, 9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Compensation Planning and Awarding Classroom Using Compensation Planning and Awarding is a course for implementation project teams and business  and support consultants. Attendees will learn how to define compensation planning and awarding within  the Compensation Management application.  Previous course name/code: Compensations Planning and Awarding/COMPPAW Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Configuration Console Classroom This course will provide you with the information to create and modify security classes using the  Configuration Console.Previous course name/code: Configuration Console/CONFIGCONOV Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Contract Management Classroom Using Contract Management is a course for users of Contract Management. Attendees will learn about  the core functionality of the Contract Management application, including integration considerations and  procurement process practices. Previous course name/code: Contract Management, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Crystal Reports Classroom Using Crystal Reports is a course that teaches the fundamentals of report design along with intermediate techniques needed to develop more complex reports. In a highly hands-on environment, students will spend a portion of the course focusing on the Crystal Reports product. The remaining time is dedicated to accessing Lawson data using Crystal Reports and OLE DB object services. This course is a five-day, instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Crystal Reports for Lawson and non-Lawson Data/CRYRPTXI Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Design Studio & JavaScript Classroom Using Design Studio & JavaScript is a course for customers, employees and partners. Attendees will learn about the Design Studio tool, a browser-based drag-and-drop graphical development environment used to customize or enhance Infor applications. This course is a three-day, instructor-led course. Previous course name/code: Using the Lawson Design Studio/Java Script, 9.0. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Encumbrances Online This course explains the use of commitments, encumbrance accounting, and budget editing within the Lawson General Ledger and General Ledger Budgeting applications.
Lawson: Using Fax Integrator Online Using Fax Integrator is a 1-hour course for Consultants (Application, IS, Support) and System Administrators. Attendees will explore prerequisites, installation and setup of the Fax Integrator product. 
Lawson: Using Flip Allocations in General Ledger Online Flip Allocations in General Ledger is a 12-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support), Project Leads, Business Analysts, QA Analysts, and Programmers. Attendees will learn how to create and use "flip" allocations in General Ledger.
Lawson: Using General Ledger Classroom  Using General Ledger is a course about the setup, processing, maintenance, and accessing information within the General Ledger.Previous course name/code: General Ledger, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using General Ledger Allocations Classroom Using General Ledger Allocations is a course for Allocations Project Teams and End Users. Attendees will learn how to create and manage allocations to multiple locations, account numbers, defining allocation spread codes, compute statements, percentage calculations, and periodic processing. Previous course name/code: General Ledger Allocations/ VGALL
Lawson: Using Global Human Resources Classroom Using Global Human Resources is a course for Human Resources Professionals and Human Resources  Administrators. Attendees will learn how to set up organization and resource data.  Previous course name/code: Global Human Resources/GLOBEHR Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Global SA Time Entry Online Global SA Time Entry is a 45 Minute Webinar course for all LL, GSC, and LPS 3rd party time reporters. Attendees will learn to enter time correctly, and to ensure proper tracking, reporting and invoicing.
Lawson: Using Goal Management Classroom Using Goal Management is a  course for individuals responsible for defining, managing and maintaining organizational goals. Attendees will learn how to use Infor Goal Management to define and cascade organizational goals. Previous course name/code: Goal Management/GOALMGMT Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Human Resources Functional Reporting Classroom Using Human Resources Functional Reporting is a course for Lawson customers and partners. Attendees will learn about Human Resources data reporting options and how to create reports with the HR Writer tool. Previous course name/code: HR Functional Reporting/VHRRPT Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Incentive Compensation Classroom Using Incentive Compensation is a course for the implementation project team and individuals  responsible for setting up and maintaining their organizations incentive compensation program.  Previous course name/code: Incentive Compensation/INCCOMP Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Infor Lawson Mobile Assets Online The purpose of this course is to demostrate how Infor Lawson Mobile Assets helps organizations quickly look up assets, perform inventory, and update asset information through mobile devices. This mobile application provides mapping of locations and barcode scanning for easier inventory and higher accuracy. This training is applicable for the following: Lawson Financials 10.0.1. This course is a 3 minute eLearning course.
Lawson: Using Infor Lawson Mobile Inventory Online Designed to work with the Inventory Control module within the Infor Lawson Supply Chain Management product suite, Infor Lawson Mobile Inventory is designed to look up and update inventory information through a mobile device. Key features include determining item availability, reviewing locations and seeing items with balance availability, reviewing and adjusting a replenishment worksheet, and reviewing and updating par levels for a location.
Lawson: Using Infor Lawson Mobile Requisitions Online The purpose of this course is to demostrate how to create requisitions, view their status, and receive shipments through an interface to Lawson Procurement applications on mobile devices. This training is applicable for the following: Lawson Financials 10.0.1. This course is a 3 minute eLearning course.
Lawson: Using Inventory Control Classroom Using Inventory control is a course for Inventory Control Team Members and Managers (Implementation,  Inventory, Materials, Warehouse). Attendees will learn the key setup components and processing  functionality of the Inventory Control application. Previous course name/code: Inventory Control, 8.0/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Invoice Matching Classroom Using Invoice Matching is a course for Consultants (Application, Support Consultants) Business Analysts, and Programmers. Attendees will learn how to set up the Invoice Matching application to meet company and vendor needs. Previous course name/code: Invoice Matching, 8.1/9.0
Lawson: Using Learning and Development Classroom Using Learning and Development is a course for anyone who will be using, adminstrating or implementing the tool. Attendees will learn what Learning and Development is, how to configure the system, and how to set up activities, standard costs, development plans, and sessions. Previous course name/code: Learning and Development/LEARNDEV
Lawson: Using Match and Reconcile - Detail Classroom Lawson: Using Match and Reconcile - Detail is a 4-hour course for Application Consultants, Support Consultants, Project Leads, and Implementation Managers. Attendees will learn the advanced features of Invoice Matching used in the matching and reconciliation processes. Previous course name/code: Match and Reconcile at a Detail Level 8.1/9.0/ADVMADET8190.
Lawson: Using Match and Reconcile - Invoice Classroom Lawson: Using Match and Reconcile - Invoice is a 3-hour course for Consultants (Application, Support), Managers (Implementation, Project), and System Administrators. Attendees will learn advanced features of Invoice Matching. Previous course name/code: Match and Reconcile at an Invoice Level 8.1/9.0/ADVMAINV8190.
Lawson: Using Microsoft Office Add-Ins Online This course explores advanced tricks and tips of Lawson Add-ins for Microsoft Office.
Lawson: Using Microsoft® Office Add-Ins Classroom This course covers installing and using Lawson Add-Ins for Microsoft® Office. This training is for versions: 10.0.x and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Introduction to Microsoft Add-ins Query Wizard (VLINTROQWIZ)/Introduction to Microsoft Add-ins Upload Wizard (VLINTROUWIZ)/ Advanced Lawson Add-ins for Microsoft Office (WLADINMS). Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Performance Management Classroom Using Performance Management is a course for HR Administrators, HR Managers, Performance Management professionals, and the Implementation project team. Attendees will learn how to successfully implement and use Lawson Performance Management to complete performance appraisals. Previous course name/code: Performance Management/PERFMGMT Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Personnel Administration Classroom Using Personnel Administration is a course for HR Implementation Project Teams and Personnel  Administration End Users. Attendees will receive a complete introduction to Lawson's Personnel  Administration application, beginning with the setup of the framework for competency and position  management. Previous course name/code: Personnel Administration, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Position Rules Online Using Position Rules is an 18-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will learn about the application form used for defining position rules, the options for each form field, and the resulting impacts to the HR suite.
Lawson: Using Process Automation Classroom Using Process Automation is a 5-day training course where attendees will learn about the components of Process Automation, such as the Process Designer and Process Server. This course provides practical, hands-on experience using the Process Designer and Process Server Administrator.. Previous course name/code: Lawson Process Automation S3 and Landmark/LPAINTS3LMRK Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using ProcessFlow and HR Online This course provides an introduction and overview to the ProcessFlow product, which is a powerful and flexible tool for automating workflow processes, with focus on Human Resourcses related examples.  This course includes information about the designer tool, which is the ProcessFlow Designer Built on Eclipse.
Lawson: Using ProcessFlow Integrator Classroom Using ProcessFlow Integrator provides the functionality for business process automation and integration. This course focuses on providing practical ProcessFlow building exercises using the ProcessFlow Designer. Previous course name/code: ProcessFlow Integrator 9.0. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using ProcessFlow Standard Classroom Using ProcessFlow Standard explains how ProcessFlow fits within the Lawson System Foundation architecture and provides an overview of ProcessFlow servers and BPM application. Previous course name/code: ProcessFlow Standard 9.0. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Project Accounting Classroom This course provides the information and practice needed to perform Project Accounting functions. This training is for version 10.0.x and all previous versions. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Purchase Orders Classroom Using Purchase Orders is a course for Consultants (Application, Support), Business Analysts, Programmers. Attendees will learn how to set up the Purchase Order application to meet company needs. Previous course name/code: Purchase Order, 8.1/9.0 Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Requisition Center Classroom Using Requisition Center is a course for Consultants (Application, IS, Support), Implementation Managers, Project Leads, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn about the major features and setup options of Requisition Center, plus gain hands-on shopping experience through course exercises. This is a 1/2 day course. Previous course name/code: Requisition Center/VREQCENT
Lawson: Using Requisitions Classroom This course covers Lawson Requisitions features and set-up processes for effectively managing your organization’s requisition activities. This training is for version(s) : 10x and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Requisitions / RQ90. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Smart Notification for Invoice Matching Online Using Smart Notification for Invoice Matching is a 20-minute course for Consultants (Application, Business, Support). Attendees will receive a high level overview of the notifications available in the Payables Solution Pack.
Lawson: Using Spreadsheet Designer for Microsoft Excel Classroom Using Spreadsheet Designer for Microsoft Excel is a course for clients, partners and employees who work with Lawson Landmark applications. Attendees will learn to create queries from Landmark applications to Microsoft Excel and create uploads to Landmark applications using the spread sheet designer. Previous course name/code: Lawson Spreadsheet Designer for Microsoft Excel
Lawson: Using Strategic Sourcing Classroom Using Strategic Sourcing is a course for Account Executives, Consultants (Application, Business, 
Support), Managers (Implementation, Project), Project Leads, and Business Analysts. Attendees will 
learn the basics of each module within the application, as well as integration considerations and their  effects on the procurement process. Previous course name/code: Strategic Sourcing, 9.0x Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using Succession Management Classroom Using Succession Management is a course for implementation project teams and business and support consultants. Attendees will learn how to describe relevant business processes, perform key setup, and utilize the capabilities of Succession Management. Previous course name/code: Succession Management/SUCCESSMGT
Lawson: Using Talent Acquisition Classroom This course covers planning, integration factors, and setup of Talent Acquisition components such as roles, code, templates, automation, and configuration of internal and external recruitment processes.
This training is for version 10.2 and all previous versions.
Previous course name/code: Talent Acquisition/TALACQ. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: Using the Data Dictionary Online Using the Data Dictionary is a 41-minute course for Consultants and System Administrators. Attendees will learn how modifications made to the database schema are propagated to the Lawson data dictionary and resulting changes to data dictionary status.
Lawson: Using the File Transfer Process Online Using the File Transfer Process is an 18-minute course for Consultants and Business Analysts. Attendees will receive an overview of the file transfer process and a step-by-step guide to the options for performing these transfers.
Lawson: Using the GEN Database Online Using the GEN Database is a 1-hour course for Consultants, Programmers, Developers, Lawson Environment Administrators, and Database Administrators. Attendees will learn the various kinds of data stored in the Lawson GEN database repository and where it comes from.
Lawson: Using the Upload Wizard for General Ledger Online Using the Upload Wizard for General Ledger is a 50-minute course. Attendees will learn the steps required to take information from an Excel spreadsheet and, using the Upload Wizard, bring the data into the Lawson system.
Lawson: Using Units of Measure for Procurement Online Units of Measure for Procurement is a 35-minute course presenting the various UOM options available and points out the restrictions and special situations encountered when using multiple units of measure.
Lawson: v10 Administering Security Classroom This course covers how to set up security roles, classes, profiles, and rules; how to grant access to data sources, forms, and files; and how to secure printers, job queues, environment services, reports, users, and security. This training is applicable for the Infor Lawson Security version 10.x and 9.x. Previous course name/code: Lawson Security Administration, 9.0/SECURADM90.
Note: This course does NOT cover Infor Landmark Security. Infor Security Services (ISS) is covered only for user provisioning. For more information about Infor Security Services attend the Lawson: System Foundation Differences 9.x-10.x course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: v10 Administering System Foundation for UNIX Classroom Lawson: Administering System Foundation for UNIX (v10) is a 5-day course for Lawson Administrators working with Foundation and Administration of LSF10 Components. Attendees will learn to effectively implement and maintain Lawson on a Unix platform. Previous course name/code:Lawson System Foundation & Administration for UNIX/LSF9TFSAU. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: v10 Administering System Foundation for Windows Classroom Lawson: Administering System Foundation for Windows (v10) is a 5-day course for Lawson Administrators working with Foundation and Administration of LSF10 Components. Attendees will learn to effectively implement and maintain Lawson on a Windows platform. Previous course name/code: Lawson System Foundation & Administration for Windows/LSF9TFSAWIN. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: v9 Administering Security Classroom Administrating Security is a course for Account Executives, Consultants (Application, Business, IS, Support, Technical), Managers (Client Account, Implementation, Project), Project Leads, Business Analysts, Programmers, and System Administrators. Attendees will learn about the role-based, rule-based object-oriented security system in Lawson Security. Previous course name/code: Lawson Security Administration, 9.0. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Lawson: v9 Administering System Foundation for UNIX Classroom Administering System Foundations for UNIX is a course for Lawson Administrators working with Foundation and Administration of LSF9 Components. Attendees will learn to effectively implement and maintain Lawson on a Unix platform. Previous course name/code: Lawson System Foundation & Administration for UNIX, 9.0
Lawson: v9 Administering System Foundation for Windows Classroom Administering System Foundation for Windows is a course for Lawson Administrators working with Foundation and Administration of LSF9 Components. Attendees will learn to effectively implement and maintain Lawson on a Windows platform. Previous course name/code: Lawson System Foundation & Administration for Windows, 9
Lawson: Vendor Agreement Introduction Online Vendor Agreement Introduction covers different types of vendor agreements, their purpose, and the functionality available for managing them.
Learning Management: Administrator Classroom The purpose of this course is to prepare you to administer courses in Infor’s Learning Management. This training is applicable for the following Infor Learning Management versions: 8 and all previous versions. This course is a 2-day, instructor-led course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Learning Management: Advanced Certification Administration Classroom The purpose of this course is to prepare you to administer advanced certification programs. This training is applicable for the following Infor Learning Management versions: 8 and all previous versions. This course is a 1-day, instructor-led course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Learning Management: Content Creator Classroom The purpose of this course is to prepare you to author e-Learning modules and assessments using Learning Management Content Creator. This training is applicable for the following Infor Learning Management version(s): 8.0 and all previous versions. This course is a 2-day, instructor-led course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
Learning Management: Social Learning Classroom The purpose of this course is to prepare you to administer, use, and moderate Community Spaces to support collaboration in learning. This 1-day, instructor-led training is applicable for version 8 and all previous versions of Infor Learning Management: Social Learning. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: BOD Development Overview Classroom This training is intended for Partners, Customers and Infor employees who plan to develop BODs on Infor LN/Baan in the near future. After the training, attendees will know how to use Business Studio to develop, extend, customize, test and troubleshoot BODs for Infor LN. CONTENT The hands-on training will guide you through the steps to: • Create a new BOD • Extend an existing BOD • Customize an existing BOD (using cc script to populate the UserArea) • Test your BODs • Troubleshoot This will be done on Infor LN 10.3. The hands-on exercises will be done on pre-configured training PC's (desktops).
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - FP2 Common Data Online ERPLN-FP2 Common Data Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - FP2 Logistic Concepts Overview Online ERPLN-FP2 Logistic Concepts Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - FP7 Logistics Fundamentals Online The set includes training materials and slides for logistics fundamentals and slides for logistics overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Common Data Online ERPLN-SP0 Common Data Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Logistic Concepts Overview Online ERPLN-SP0 Logistic Concepts Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Multi-Company Workshop Online ERPLN-SP0 Multi-Company Workshop Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Object Data Mgt (ODM) Online ERPLN-SP0 Object Data Mgt (ODM) Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Webtop Navigation Online ERPLN-SP0 Webtop Navigation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Cross Function Training Guide - SP0 Worktop Navigation Online ERPLN-SP0 Worktop Navigation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Distribution & Logistics Training Guide - EDI User Guide Online EDI User Guide Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Distribution & Logistics Training Guide - Logistics Fundamentals Online Logistics Fundamentals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Distribution & Logistics Training Guide - Sales Management Online Sales Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Distribution & Logistics Training Guide - Warehousing Management Online Warehousing Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Modeler Training Guide - FP7 Dynamic Enterprise Modeler Online Contains training materials and slides for DEM, slides for the Enterprise Modeler, and a general process flow in text format. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Modeler Training Guide - SP0 Dynamic Enterprise Modeler (DEM) Online ERPLN-SP0 Dynamic Enterprise Modeler (DEM) Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Planning Foundation Classroom This course covers fundamental LN: Enterprise Planning functions and related processes including order planning, master planning, resource planning, order pegging, and exception messages. This training is for version: 10.3 only. Previous course name/code: Enterprise Planning LN-PLA1. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: Enterprise Planning Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Production Planner Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Production Planner Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Planning Training Guide - FP7 Enterprise Planning -- Advanced Topics Online Topics in the course: ATP, Capacity ATP, Component ATP, Channel in ATP, Replenishment Planning (DRP using warehouse clusters), and multi-sourcing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Planning Training Guide - FP7 Master Based Planning Online This training covers master planning (MPS). Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Enterprise Planning Training Guide - FP7 Order Based Planning Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Order Based Planning Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario Training Guide (French) Online Fast Start Business Scenario Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Cycle Counting v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Cycle Counting Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Design to Produce v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Design to Produce Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Financial Year End v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Financial Year End Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Inventory Adjustment Order v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Inventory Adjustment Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Order to Cash v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Order to Cash Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Period Closing v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Period Closing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Plan to Build v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Plan to Build Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Procure to Pay v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Procure to Pay Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Fast Start Business Scenario/Exercises Training Guide - Quotation to Order v6.1 Online ERPLN Fast Start Business Scenario and Exercises - Quotation to Order Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Cash Management Online Cash Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fast Start Financials (French) Online Fast Start Financials Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fast Start Integration Work Sheet Online Fast Start LN Financial Integration work sheet Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Accounts Payable Clerk Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Finance - Accounts Payable Clerk Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Accounts Receivable Clerk Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Finance - Accounts Receivable Clerk Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - General Ledger Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Finance - General Ledger Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Accounts Payable Online ERPLN-FP2 Accounts Payable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Accounts Receivable Online ERPLN-FP2 Accounts Receivable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Controlling Online ERPLN-FP2 Controlling Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Financial Concepts Overview Online ERPLN-FP2 Financial Concepts Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Financial Integrations Online ERPLN-FP2 Financial Integrations Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 Fixed Assets Online ERPLN-FP2 Fixed Assets Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP2 General Ledger Online ERPLN-FP2 General Ledger Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Accounts Payable Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Accounts Payable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Accounts Receivable Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Accounts Receivable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Finance Essentials Online This training provides an overview of the financial processes. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Fixed Assets Management Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Fixed Assets Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 General Ledger and Financial Budgets Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 General Ledger and Financial Budgets Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Integrations and Cost Price Calculation Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Integrations and Cost Price Calculation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - FP7 Period-End Closing and Integrations Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Period-End Closing and Integrations Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - Fundamentals Online Finance Fundamentals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Accounts Payable Online ERPLN-SP0 Accounts Payable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Accounts Receivable Online ERPLN-SP0 Accounts Receivable Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Controlling Online ERPLN-SP0 Controlling Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Financial Concepts Overview Online ERPLN-SP0 Financial Concepts Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Financial Integrations Online ERPLN-SP0 Financial Integrations Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 Fixed Assets Online ERPLN-SP0 Fixed Assets Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Finance Training Guide - SP0 General Ledger Online ERPLN SP0 General Ledger Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Foundation Classroom The purpose of this course is to provide an overview of the major modules in LN, and related functions and business processes. This course provides the foundation of information required for other LN courses. This training is applicable for the following Infor LN version(s): 10.3 and all previous versions. This course is a 5-day instructor-led course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: Foundation (Spanish) Classroom La finalidad de este curso es proporcionar un resumen de los módulos principales de LN y de las funciones y los procesos empresariales relacionados. Este curso ofrece la base de información necesaria para otros cursos de LN. Esta formación es aplicable para las siguientes versiones de Infor LN: 10.3 y todas las versiones anteriores. Este es un curso de cinco días de duración, impartido por un instructor. Nombre/código del curso previo: Resumen de Infor LN. Haga clic AQUI para ver la descripción del curso y la agenda.
LN: FP5 Allocation and Hard Pegging Part 1 Online This presentation focuses on the changes for Allocation and Hard Pegging for ERP LN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Allocation and Hard Pegging Part 2 Online This second presentation on Allocation and Hard Pegging in ERP LN FP5 provides business examples and how to solve them with the new functionality. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Assembly Control Differences Online Presentation on new functionality in ERP LN FP5 Assembly Control including: The use of the configurator in ASC, Assembled end-items in inventory and the new sequencing engine for ASC and Planning. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Freight Management Part 1 Online Presentation on the positioning of freight management, master data setup, and configuration options of Freight Management in feature pack 5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Freight Management Part 2 Online Presentation 2 of Freight Management focuses on the key modules of Freight Order Control, Planning and Costing in ERP LN feature pack 5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Internal Online Presentation on changes in ERPLN FP5 related to internal financial ownership of inventory related to new functionality in VMI and subcontracting. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Inventory Disposition Online Presentation on the new handling disposition functionality in ERP LN FP 5 release. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Inventory Shortage Handling Online Presentation on new inventory shortage handling functionality to support high volume sales order entry, EDI and ATP within ERPLN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 1 Online Presentation 1 of 6 on Mfg and Planning differences on ERPLN FP5 focuses on improvements in data entry for conversion factors, Recurrences and Patters and enhancements in duplicating and group copying of Bills of Material. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 2 Online Presentation 2-6 of EPRLN FP5 Mfg and Planning differences focuses on: Warehouse Link to all Item Sub-Entities, showing the item signal on planned orders and allowing the actualization of cost price from Item-Costing. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 3 Online Presentation 3 of 6 for manufacturing and planning differences in ERPLN FP5 focuses on: Enhancements to updating routing operations, how to automatically remove queue, wait and move times from operations, Where used work centers and tasks, enhancements to Material issue note, Production Order Checklist and Production Report. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 4 Online Presentation 4 of 6 focuses on new fuctionality in ERPLN FP5 including: Mass reschedule of production orders, status dependent production order reprocessing, Grid report operations complete, streamline production order print and release, reverse backflushing, reset SFC order from completed to active. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 5 Online In presentation 5 of 6 for manufacturing and planning differences in ERPLN FP5, the focus is on printing labels, overview session for BOM's and BOM validation. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Manufacturing and Planning Differences Part 6 Online Presentation 6 of 6 for Mfg and Planning differences in ERP LN FP5 focuses on: Item Order Plan improvements, Special Contract selection for transferred orders from enterprise planning and performance improvements Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Order Management Differences Online General Presentation on order management differences in ERP LN FP5 including, common data, sales, purchasing and usability differences. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Service - Allocation and Hard Pegging Online Presentation on how Allocation and Hard Pegging is utilized in Field Service, Maintenance Sales and Depot Repair in ERPLN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Service - Quotations Online Presentation on new quotation functionality in Service within ERPLN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Service - Usability Online Presentation of the usability improvements in ERPLN FP 5 Service including: Grouping Planned Activities by Item, PM for serialized items, Lot not in inventory, and the use of PCS items in Depot Repair Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Service - Warranty Online Presentation 3 of 4 for ERP LN FP5 Service focuses on Warranty differences in the Feature Pack 5 release. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Ship Kits Online Presentation of new Kit functionality in ERPLN FP5 including: Visibility of the kit structure throughout the process from ordering, to picking to invoicing, Ability to ship components of kits with different planned dates(incomplete kits), Ability to incorporate mfg BOM changes on order within order lead time and ability to direct deliver Kit components. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Standard Currency System and Reporting Online Presentation on the differences in ERPLN FP5 for currency handling and financial statement reporting Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Subcontracting Material Flow Online This presentation focuses on the differences in subcontracting for ERPLN FP5 including: Support of material flow to subcontractors, support of the entire manufacturing process being handled by a subcontractor, if subcontracting for others you now have the ability to plan and execute subcontracted activities and control material flow as the subcontractor. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Table Sharing Online Presentation of table sharing concepts within ERP LN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Terms and Conditions Online Presentation of the new Terms and Conditions functionality to support purchase and sales contracts, VMI, Subcontracting, Allocation and Hard Pegging and Financial Ownership in ERP LN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Usability Improvements Online Presentation on the usability improvements of ERP LN with the feature pack 5 release. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: FP5 Vendor Managed Inventory Online Presentation of the new Vendor Managed Inventory functionality in ERP LN FP5. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: How To Request a Virtual Class Online How to request an LN virtual class be put on the schedule. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Development Online Development Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Exchange Tools Online Exchange Tools Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Fast Start How to Install and Configure BIRT Online Fast Start How to Install and Configure BIRT Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Fast Start Installation Guide for WebTop Online ERPLN Fast Start Installation Guide for WebTop Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Fast Start Technical (French) Online Fast Start Technical Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - System Administrator Role Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - System Administrator Role Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Programmer Fundamentals Online Programmer Fundamentals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - SP0 Enterprise Server Administration Online ERPLN-SP0 Enterprise Server Administration Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - SP0 Enterprise Server Overview Online ERPLN-SP0 Enterprise Server Overview Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - SP0 Enterprise Studio Online ERPLN-SP0-Enterprise Studio Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - SP0 Migration Pack BIV to LN Online ERPLN-SP0 Migration Pack BIV to LN Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - SP0 MIgration Pack ManMan to LN Online ERPLN-SP0 MIgration Pack ManMan to LN Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - System Administrator Fundamentals Online System Administrator Fundamentals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: IT/Tools Training Guide - Tools Fundamentals Online Tools Fundamentals Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Livro de exercícios de treinamento do Foundation Classroom O objetivo deste curso é fornecer uma visão geral dos principais módulos do LN, bem como funções relacionadas e processos empresariais. Este curso fornece a base necessária de informações para outros cursos LN. Este treinamento é aplicável às seguintes versões do Infor LN: 10.3 e todas as versões anteriores. Este curso é um curso de 5 dias ministrado por instrutor. Clique AQUI para obter a descrição do curso e agenda.
LN: Manufacturing & Planning Training Guide - Enterprise Planning Online Enterprise Planning Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Foundation Classroom This course covers LN Manufacturing fundamentals and related processes. This training is for version: 10.3 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: Manufacturing Essentials/LN-SFC1. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - Fast Start Manufacturing (French) Online Fast Start Manufacturing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Shop Floor Clerk Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Shop Floor Clerk Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Shop Floor Dispatch Control Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Shop Floor Dispatch Control Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Cost Accounting Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Cost Accounting Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Engineering Data Management Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Engineering Data Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Product Configurator Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Product Configurator Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Project Control System Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Project Control System Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Repetitive Manufacturing Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Repetitive Manufacturing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Shop Floor Control Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Shop Floor Control Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Subcontracting with Material Flow Online The training covers subcontracting with material flow, item subcontracting, and the subcontractor's role. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - FP7 Unit Effectivity Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Unit Effectivity Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Manufacturing Training Guide - SP0 Manufacturing and Shop Floor Online ERPLN-SP0 Manufacturing and Shop Floor Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Navigation Online This course introduces the basic layout and navigation of the LN application through a unified Ming.le user interface. This training is for LN versions: 10.3 and 10.2.1 only, not other previous versions.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - Fast Start Sales & Purchasing (French) Online Fast Start Sales & Purchasing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Purchasing Agent Role Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Purchasing Agent Role Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Sales Entry Admin Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Sales Entry Admin Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - FP7 Pricing and Discounts Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Pricing and Discounts Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - FP7 Purchase Control Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Purchase Control Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - FP7 Sales and Purchase Statistics Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Sales and Purchase Statistics Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - FP7 Sales Control Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Sales Control Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - FP7 Vendor Rating Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Vendor Rating Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - SP0 Purchasing Online ERPLN-SP0 Purchasing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Order Management Training Guide - SP0 Sales Order Management Online ERPLN-SP0 Sales Order Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Procurement Management Foundation Classroom This course covers LN Procurement fundamentals used to manage purchase activities and maintain the activity data. This training is for version: 10.3. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: Project Training Guide - SP0 Project Online ERPLN-SP0 Project Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Quality Management Training Guide - SP0 Quality Management System Online ERPLN-SP0 Quality Management System Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Service Foundation Classroom This course covers the LN service management functions and related processes. This training is for version 10.3 and all previous versions. Previous course name: Infor LN 10.2 Service. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
LN: Service Training Guide - SP0 Service Online ERPLN-SP0 Service Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Subscription v10 Online The Infor LN Subscription Library includes self-paced eLearning courses that supplement the classroom experience, and help build confident, self-reliant users. The subscription includes two types of eLearning - courses and simulations. Courses combine overviews of new concepts, theories, and processes with demonstrations of key functions and practice exercises. Simulations provide step-by-step instruction on how to complete common processes across the application.
LN: Training Guide - SP0 Freight Management Online ERPLN-SP0 Freight Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - Fast Start Warehousing (French) Online Fast Start Warehousing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - Fast Start Work Instructions - Warehouse Management Online ERP LN Fast Start Work Instructions - Warehouse Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Dynamic Cross Docking and Direct Material Supply Online Set includes training materials and slides for dynamic cross docking and direct material supply. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Handling Units Online Set includes training manual and slides Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Inventory Planning Online The material covers inventory planning using Kanban, TPOP, OCS, and OCB. The set includes training material and slides. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Lot Control Online Includes training material and slides. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Replenishment Matrix Online The replenishment location matrix defines relationships between locations in a warehouse. This enables automated replenishments to take place. The replenishment matrix is defined by linking pick locations to bulk locations. Pick locations are designated for order picking purposes. They are mainly used for outbound small quantities or containers that can be replenished by bulk locations. Bulk locations, on the other hand, are used mainly for inbound large quantities or containers meant to replenish the pick location. Location replenishment is responsible for maintaining the products and their quantities in the dedicated pick locations. In order to automatically generate the location transfers that will bring the pick location up to maximum quantity level (the replenishment list), a set of priorities is defined in the Replenishment Location Matrix table. The order in the replenishment process is that the lowest priority value corresponds to the highest priority level. Identical priority values are possible. The location replenishment process is controlled by the replenishment location matrix. The minimum product replenishment levels are indicated for the location designated as the picking area for an item.
Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Serialized Items Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Serialized Items Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Statiscial Inventory Control Online ERP LN 6.1 FP7 Statiscial Inventory Control Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - FP7 Warehousing Essentials Online Covers inventory adjustments, inventory transfers, receipts, inspection, material issues, and other warehouse topics. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LN: Warehouse Management Training Guide - SP0 Warehouse Management Online ERPLN-SP0 Warehouse Management Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Batch Size Versus Lot Size Online Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Character Based Navigation Online Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: E-Signature Online Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Promotions, Deals and Pricing (PRO) - Creating an Off Invoice Promotion Online This video includes step by step instructions on how to create an off invoice-line level promotion. The example used is a promotion offering a discount for the purchase of a minimum quantity of the promoted product during a specified period of time. The discount is taken directly off the invoice price of the purchased product. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Accounts Payable (ACP) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online

The course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Accounts Payable product.

This course discusses the system maintenance procedures including the setup cycle, processing invoices and payment transactions through Advanced Transaction Processing. This course also illustrates how to run inquiry and report programs and to perform period-end close procedures.

This course introduces the impact of euro on A/P product conceptually. For detailed information, refer to the euro Enabled BPCS course.

Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Accounts Payable (ACP) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

This Accounts Payable workshop takes you through the accounts payable process, from setting up system fundamentals to detailed financial reporting.

Emphasis is placed on processing payables, payments, and assessing payable liability.

Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Accounts Receivable (ACR) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the BPCS Accounts Receivable (ACR) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Accounts Receivable product. The course illustrates how to effectively collect and report information to assist in collecting receivables, assessing credit, and reducing bad debt. This course also describes processing ACR transactions through Advanced Transaction Processing (ATP).

This course introduces the impact of euro in A/R product conceptually. For detailed information, refer to the Euro Enabled BPCS course.

Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Accounts Receivable (ACR) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

This Accounts Receivable workshop takes you through the accounts receivable process, from setting up system fundamentals to detailed financial reporting.

Emphasis is placed on collecting receivables, assessing credit, and reducing bad debt.

Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Advanced Process Industries (API) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online This course has been designed for clients seeking detailed training in the functionality of the BPCS Advanced Process Industries (API) product. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Advanced Process Industries (API) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the INFOR ERPLX Advanced Process Industries (API) product.

API provides additional functionality for users in a variety of industries, and is not restricted to the process industries. To accommodate this aspect of the product, the course is divided into lessons byfunctionality.

Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - Advanced Remittance Processing (ARP) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to Infor and the BPCS Advanced Remittance Processing (ARP) Workshop. This course is designed for clients who are seeking detailed training in the World-Class Financials products. The prerequisite for this course is an understanding of basic accounting principles and successful completion of the BPCS Concepts and Applications Course. The approach taken in presenting the material reflects the system implementation methodology adopted during installation of the BPCS World-Class Financial products. This course begins with an overview, followed by an examination of the setup cycle, which is a step-by-step process of setting up system parameters and creating required master files. The transaction processing cycles are then covered followed by a look at on-line inquiries and reporting. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
LX: Training Guide - CEA Subsystem Integration (CSI) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the CEA Subsystem Integration (CSI) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the Advanced Transaction Processing (ATP) integration approach. The course describes in detail the setup steps for ATP, reviews the process to input and post subsystem transactions, and discusses ATP implementation considerations. This course also discusses the Batch Transaction Processing (BTP) depending on the audience needs. The prerequisites for this course are:
  • Understanding of basic accounting principles
  • Successful completion of the BPCS Concepts and Applications course
  • Successful completion of the BPCS Configurable Enterprise Financials Workshop Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Concepts and Application (C&A) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online Welcome to the Concepts and Applications workshop for INFOR ERP LX 8.3.2. The course introduces basic concepts and business processes in manufacturing, production planning, and enterprise management, and will provide you with general knowledge of the main features and functions of INFOR ERP LX 8.3.2. The course describes, at a high level, how you might use the INFOR ERP LX applications and how they work together in an integrated manner. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Concepts and Applications (C&A) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online This course is designed to integrate the basic concepts of Financial, Distribution, and Manufacturing business management with an overview of BPCS/AS products. The prerequisite for this course is a basic understanding of Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II) concepts. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Concepts and Applications (C&A) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online

    Welcome to the CONCEPTS & APPLICATIONS Course. This course introduces the conceptual issues concerning the manufacturing and planning processes. You are presented conceptual issues and actual business requirements. Emphasis is placed on the integration of the main BPCS C/S products with each other.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Configurable Enterprise Accounting (CEA) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Configurable Enterprise Accounting (CEA) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking advanced training in the BPCS Client/Server Configurable Enterprise Accounting products. The course covers the following topics:
  • An overview of BPCS Configurable Enterprise Accounting (CEA) products.
  • Important implementation issues such as Access Control, System Parameters, and Account Rules.
  • Allocations and Process Monitor.
  • Structure Setup, Rollups, and Inquiries.
  • Period/Year End Processing including Translation, Consolidation, and Transfer Opening Balances process.
  • CEA Reporting functionality including USERVision Player and Financial Report Writer. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Configurable Enterprise Accounting (CEA) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    This course is a high-level overview that teaches a little bit about a lot of INFOR ERP LX. It emphasizes the main points of core product use and integration.

    This workshop describes how businesses can integrate the INFOR ERP LX products, and simulates a very basic but real-world implementation and process flow.

    Every student is not expected to know all aspects of all business processes in an enterprise, but the course may help you appreciate what other departments or divisions do and how your own actions may influence other INFOR ERP LX users. The student guide introduces products that complement the core INFOR ERP LX suite and contains interactive, task-based exercises that demonstrate how to set up system fundamentals, plan, manage, and execute operations strategically, and monitor processes using INFOR ERP LX products.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Cost Accounting (CST) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to INFOR and the BPCS Cost Accounting Workshop. This course has been designed for clients who are seeking detailed training in the World-Class Manufacturing/Financials products. The prerequisite for this course is an understanding of cost accounting concepts and successful completion of the following BPCS courses:
  • Concepts & Applications
  • Manufacturing Planning and Control
  • Manufacturing Execution and Control
  • Purchasing Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Cost Accounting (CST) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Cost Accounting (CST) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Cost Accounting product. The following products must be installed before implementing the Cost Accounting product:
  • Inventory (INV)
  • Manufacturing Data Management (MDM)
  • Capacity Planning (CAP)

    Additionally, the following optional products may be installed if related costs are to be maintained:

  • Shop Floor Control (SFC) if manufacturing costs are to be maintained.
  • Purchasing (PUR) if purchased costs are to be maintained.
  • Advanced Transaction Processing (ATP) if material, labor and overhead actual costs are accumulated in the Configurable Ledger for work-in-progress inventory valuation.
  • Configurable Ledger (CLD) if material, labor and overhead actual costs are accumulated for work-in-progress inventory valuation. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Cost Accounting (CST) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online Welcome to the Cost Accounting Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the ERPLX Cost Accounting product. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Credit and Deduction Management (CDM) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to INFOR and the Credit and Deduction Management (CDM) Workshop. This course is designed for clients who are seeking detailed training in the World-Class Financials products. The prerequisite for this course is an understanding of basic accounting principles and successful completion of the Concepts and Applications Course. This course begins with an overview, followed by an examination of the setup cycle, which is a step-by-step process of setting up system parameters and creating required master files. The inquiry and maintenance functions are then covered followed by a look at scheduled processing. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Distribution (DST) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online This course is designed to give students an overview of the BPCS Distribution system and provide a basic foundation on BPCS products. Detailed courses are available for students who require a comprehensive understanding of the BPCS Distribution Products. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Distribution Resources Planning (DRP) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online The Distribution Resource Planning Workshop introduces the concepts of Distribution Resource Planning, defines some commonly used DRP terms, and presents the usage of the DRP product.

    BPCS Distribution Resource Planning (DRP) uses a time-phased method to determine resupply requirements at each facility (physical stock holding point). The netting logic is similar to Master Production Scheduling (MPS) and Material Requirements Planning (MRP) products. MPS and MRP use the information from the bill of materials to determine stock replenishment through shop orders and purchase orders. DRP uses the supply relationship between facilities to determine the stock replenishment using resupply orders and purchase orders. DRP is a closed-loop Supply Chain Management system that addresses several critical business issues.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Distribution Resources Planning (DRP) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    This is a comprehensive course that introduces Infor ERPLX Distribution Resource Planning (DRP). The DRP product uses a time-phased method to determine resupply requirements at each facility (physical stock holding point). The netting logic is similar to Master Production Scheduling (MPS) and Material Requirements Planning (MRP) products.

    MPS and MRP use the information from the bill of materials to determine stock replenishment through shop orders and purchase orders. DRP uses the supply relationship between facilities to determine the stock replenishment using resupply orders and purchase orders. DRP is a closed-loop Supply Chain Management system that addresses several critical business issues.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Electronic Commerce Manager (ECM) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Electronic Commerce Manager (ECM) Advanced Product Workshop course. This course introduces the conceptual issues concerning electronic commerce and integration with BPCS. You are presented conceptual issues and actual business requirements. Emphasis is placed on setting up all information necessary to get an electronic commerce message from the outside world and place that information in the appropriate areas in BPCS. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Euro Enabled (EEB) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online This training guide discusses the following:
  • What is the euro?
  • Euro and Its Effect on BPCS
  • How the euro Affects Business
  • Alternate Currencies
  • Euro Data Conversion Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Financial Accounting (FIN) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to Infor and the BPCS Financial Accounting Workshop. This course has been designed for clients who are seeking detailed training in the World-Class Financials products. The course is composed of the following modules:
  • General Ledger
  • Accounts Payable
  • Accounts Receivable and Taxation
  • Multiple Currencies and Currency Translation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Fixed Assets (FXA) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Fixed Assets (FXA) Workshop. This guide is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Fixed Assets product. The course covers the following topics:
  • The benefits of implementing BPCS Assets
  • An overview of the U.S. Federal Tax Regulations supported by FXA
  • The FXA setup requirements and user-defined customizing options
  • Processing asset additions, depreciation, retirements, deletions, and transfers
  • Tracking activity with reports
  • Running period-end and year-end processing programs Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Forecasting (FOR) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to the Forecasting Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Forecasting product. The purpose of a forecasting system is to replace subjective forecasting tools with a system that provides accurate predictions of future demand. The BPCS Forecasting product uses proven modeling and statistical techniques to generate forecasts while allowing the flexibility to make adjustments. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Forecasting (FOR) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Forecasting Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Forecasting product. The purpose of a forecasting system is to replace subjective forecasting tools with a system that provides accurate predictions of future demand. The BPCS Forecasting product uses proven modeling and statistical techniques to generate forecasts while allowing the flexibility to make adjustments. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Inventory Management (INV) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Inventory Management Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Inventory Management product. No other BPCS Client/Server products are required before implementing the Inventory Management product. However, the Inventory Management system is a prerequisite for other products since the Item Master program is used by many BPCS Client/Server products. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Inventory Management (INV) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    The goal of this course is for students to be provided with theory and skills training in the Inventory Management product, and the business processes that are involved in enterprise inventory management.

    After completing this course, you will be able to:

  • Define the six levels of inventory.
  • Summarize Inventory Management features.
  • Explain Inventory Management integration with other INFOR ERPLX products.
  • Navigate through Inventory Management applications.
  • Summarize Inventory Management setup requirements.
  • Define transaction effects and reason codes.
      Describe Inventory Management programs.
    • Inquiries and reports
    • Period-end close
    • Cycle counting
    • Physical inventory
    • Identify how the euro affects inventory transaction processing. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Inventory Management (INV) - LX (v8.3.4) Workshop Online

    The goal of this course is for students to be provided with theory and skills training in the Inventory Management product, and the business processes that are involved in enterprise inventory management.

    After completing this course, you will be able to:

  • Define the six levels of inventory.
  • Summarize Inventory Management features.
  • Explain Inventory Management integration with other INFOR ERPLX products.
  • Navigate through Inventory Management applications.
  • Summarize Inventory Management setup requirements.
  • Define transaction effects and reason codes.
      Describe Inventory Management programs.
    • Inquiries and reports
    • Period-end close
    • Cycle counting
    • Physical inventory
    • Identify how the euro affects inventory transaction processing. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Just-In-Time Repetitive (JIT) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Welcome to INFOR and the Just-In-Time/Repetitive (JIT) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the manufacturing product, Just-In-Time (JIT). The prerequisite for this course is an understanding of basic manufacturing principles and successful completion of BPCS/AS Concepts and Applications, Manufacturing Planning and Control Workshop, and Manufacturing Execution and Control Workshop. This course begins with an overview, followed by an examination of the setup cycle, a step-by-step process of setting up system parameters and creating required master files. Planning and scheduling options are covered in detail, followed by production release and reporting as well as a look at on-line inquiries and reports. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Just-In-Time Repetitive (JIT) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the JIT/Repetitive Course. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training on the BPCS JIT/Repetitive product. It introduces the JIT Manufacturing and Repetitive Manufacturing philosophies. The course integrates these manufacturing techniques with BPCS scheduling, inventory control, and production control and reporting. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Manufacturing Planning and Control (MPW) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online The Manufacturing Planning and Control Workshop addresses the planning processes necessary to control the rates of production, purchasing, distribution, and capacity resources to achieve the desired target levels of customer service, inventory investment, manufacturing efficiency and ultimately profit and return on investment. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Multi-Mode Manufacturing (MMM) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Multi-Mode Manufacturing Workshop. This workshop takes you through the manufacturing process from setting up system fundamentals to performance reporting. This course is intended for anyone who uses BPCS to run a manufacturing business&63719;from those responsible for planning system set up to those who run individual day-to-day operations. It is recommended that students take the prerequisite course Concepts and Applications before attending this course. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Multi-Mode Manufacturing (MMM) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online This Manufacturing process workshop takes you through the manufacturing process, from setting up system fundamentals to performance reporting. Emphasis is placed on Manufacturing Data Management, Capacity Planning, and Production Activity Control. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Multi-Mode Manufacturing (MMM) - LX (v8.3.4) Workshop Online This Manufacturing process workshop takes you through the manufacturing process, from setting up system fundamentals to performance reporting. Emphasis is placed on Manufacturing Data Management, Capacity Planning, and Production Activity Control. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Multiple Currencies (MLT) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Multiple Currencies (MLT) Workshop. This course is designed for clients seeking detailed training in the BPCS Client/Server Multiple Currencies product. The course describes the setup procedures affecting the other BPCS Client/Server products when using Multiple Currencies. It also explains how payments in foreign currencies are processed. This course introduces the impact of euro in MLT product conceptually. For detailed information, refer to the Euro Enabled BPCS course. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Outbound Logistics Management (OLM) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Outbound Logistics Management (OLM) Course. This course introduces you to how to use the product and its features. You are presented conceptual issues and actual business a business scenario. Emphasis is placed on.the tasks that you complete. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Promotions, Deals and Pricing (PRO) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    This course is a high-level overview that teaches you about setting up and using prices and promotions in INFOR ERPLX. It emphasizes the main points of core product use and integration.

    This workshop describes how businesses can utilize the INFOR ERPLX products, and simulates a very basic but real-world implementation and process flow. Every student is not expected to know all aspects of all business processes in an enterprise, but the course may help you appreciate what other departments or divisions do and how your own actions may influence other INFOR ERPLX users.

    The student guide introduces pricing and promotions applications that complement the core INFOR ERPLX suite and contains interactive, task-based exercises that demonstrate how to set up system fundamentals, plan, manage, and execute pricing and promotional operations strategically, and monitor these processes using INFOR ERPLX products.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the statuswill not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Purchasing (PUR) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online This guide is designed to give you the knowledge and practice you need to effectively use the Purchasing product. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Purchasing (PUR) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    This course is covers the daily processes of controlling material flow to products.

    You learn how INFOR ERPLX 8.3.2 Purchasing controls long term, medium range, and short term planning cycles, and are presented with conceptual issues and actual business requirements.

    Emphasis is placed using the full cycle of production from establishing vendors to final receipt of the product. The course also emphasizes the main points of core INFOR ERPLX 8.3.2 product use and integration.

    This workshop describes how businesses can integrate the INFOR ERPLX products, and simulates a very basic but real-world implementation and process flow.

    Every student is not expected to know all aspects of all business processes in an enterprise, but the course may help you appreciate what other departments or divisions do and how your own actions may influence other INFOR ERPLX users.

    The student guide contains interactive, hands-on exercises that demonstrate how to set up system fundamentals, plan, manage, and execute purchasing operations strategically, and monitor processes using INFOR ERPLX products.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Purchasing (PUR) - LX (v8.3.4) Workshop Online

    This course is covers the daily processes of controlling material flow to products.

    You learn how INFOR ERPLX 8.3.4 Purchasing controls long term, medium range, and short term planning cycles, and are presented with conceptual issues and actual business requirements.

    Emphasis is placed using the full cycle of production from establishing vendors to final receipt of the product. The course also emphasizes the main points of core INFOR ERPLX 8.3.4 product use and integration.

    This workshop describes how businesses can integrate the INFOR ERPLX products, and simulates a very basic but real-world implementation and process flow.

    Every student is not expected to know all aspects of all business processes in an enterprise, but the course may help you appreciate what other departments or divisions do and how your own actions may influence other INFOR ERPLX users.

    The student guide contains interactive, hands-on exercises that demonstrate how to set up system fundamentals, plan, manage, and execute purchasing operations strategically, and monitor processes using INFOR ERPLX products.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Quality and Laboratory Management Systems(QMS) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online The Quality Management System / Laboratory Management System Workshop addresses the process of:
  • Implementing a quality management system
  • Integrating that system into the business enterprise
  • Optimizing the system through resource management. A full range of reporting and analysis capabilities are illustrated. Each process is reinforced through comprehensive practical exercises built upon common business scenarios. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
  • LX: Training Guide - Quality Management Systems (QMS) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online This QMS Workshop takes you through the Quality Management process, from setting up system fundamentals to reporting. Emphasis is placed on the QMS and LMS modules. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Release Management System (RMS) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Release Management System Course. This course introduces the conceptual issues and hands-on experience to be successful using RMS. You are presented conceptual issues and actual business requirements. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Supply Chain Management (SCM) - BPCS (v6.1) Workshop Online Welcome to the Supply Chain Management Workshop. This workshop is designed to give students an overview of the BPCS Supply Chain Management system and provide a basic foundation on BPCS products. Detailed courses are available for students who require a comprehensive understanding of BPCS Supply Chain Management Products. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Supply Chain Management (SCM) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online

    This is a comprehensive course that introduces general concepts and business processes concerning Supply Chain Management. The course describes, at a high level, how you might use the relevant INFOR ERP LX applications and how they work together in a finely integrated manner.

    This course also provides practical exercises on many of the main functions in the INFOR ERP LX Supply Chain Management applications most commonly used in an enterprise.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Techincal Concepts and Fundamentals (TCF) - LX (v8.3.2) Workshop Online This course will provide you with the technical information and knowledge to confidently install, set up, and run INFOR ERP LX 8.3.2 on the iSeries platform. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide - Warehouse Management (WHM) - BPCS (v405CD) Workshop Online Upon completion of this course, you should be able to apply and implement INFOR Warehouse Management. You will understand the data needed to utilize the product, as well as its interaction with other INFOR products. The pre-requisite for this course is completion of a Distribution Concepts and Applications course.

    The course examines the Warehouse Management System Parameters and the set-up data required by the product. Purchase Orders will be created, and then processed through Goods Receipt and Putaway. Customer Orders will be created, Picked and Shipped. The course will also cover the administration processes necessary to manage a Warehouse efficiently.

    Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide List (v405CD) Online This document contains a list of KnowledgeZone training guides in pdf form for version 405CD. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide List (v6.1) Online This document contains a list of KnowledgeZone training guides in pdf form for version 6.1. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Training Guide List (v8.3.2) Online This document contains a list of KnowledgeZone training guides in pdf form for version 8.3.2. Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    LX: Webtop Navigation Online Webtop Navigation Note: Due to the format of the content of this course, the status will not change from "Not Started" after launching the course.
    M3: Administering LifeCycle Manager Classroom This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the tasks required to secure LifeCycle Manager, administer fixes, and control and maintain Infor M3. In the class, attendees execute tasks, learn the standard procedure for fix handling, and work through scenarios that illustrate the functionality available. Previous course name/code: LifeCycle Manager Administration/LCMN. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Administering Smart Office Classroom This one-day course covers in detail how Smart office administrators can set up Infor Smart Office for their organization. After this course, administrators will be able to edit the profile, manage widgets and personalization, edit the settings files and monitor Smart office in the Grid. Previous course name/code: Smart Office Administration M3/SMON. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Administering the Grid Classroom Teaches the concepts, structure, and basic functionality of the Grid from an M3 perspective. Content applies to gridded Infor versions 10.1 and May 2011 HB and higher..
    This course introduces the basics of the Infor Grid. In the Grid Work Management section, participants are shown how to change the runtime behavior of the M3 application. The course also describes the file structure for the grid and the grid security. Previous course name/code: M3 Grid Administration/MJGRA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Automatic Document Capture for Supplier Invoices 10.1.0 Technical Walkthrough Online Detailed session used for new solution/new technology to communicate the platforms, architecture and technologies being used.
    Release date: Mars -14
    M3: Configuring Accounts Payable Classroom This one-day course is designed for learners who wish to get the best use of the Accounts Payable functionality of M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined. Previous course name/code: Accounts Payable Configuration/APLC.
    M3: Configuring Accounts Receivable Classroom This one-day course is designed for learners who want to effectively use M3 Accounts Receivable. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined. Previous course name/code: Accounts Receivable Configuration/ARLC.
    M3: Configuring and Using Customer LifeCycle Management (CLM) Classroom
    This course introduces the Customer Lifecycle Management (CLM), the Infor M3 Customer Relationship Management (CRM) system. CLM is tightly integrated with Infor M3 and is the single access point to all customer related data. It`s real time, always up to date, and can be accessed directly from Infor Smart Office, via the Internet or from a mobile device like smartphone or tablet PCs. During this course you will learn how CLM supports the Sales Process and how it allows you to configure it to meet your re-quirements.
    The training is applicable for Infor CLM version 15.2 in connection to Infor M3 version 13.1 (10.1 or later). The course is a two-day instructor-led course. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Configuring Customer Orders Classroom This one-day course is designed for learners who wish to get the best use of the Customer Order Management functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined. Previous course name/code: Customer Order Configuration/SLSC.
    M3: Configuring Distribution Order Classroom This one-day course will help you get the best use of the Distribution Orders functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Distribution Order Configuration/DOPC
    M3: Configuring Equipment Handling for ESM&R Classroom This two-day course will show you how to effectively use M3 Equipment Management for the Equipment Service Management & Rental industry. This includes all functions to configure the equipment. Previous course name/code: Equipment Handling for ESM&R/ESMREQH
    M3: Configuring General Ledger Classroom This one-day course is designed for learners who wish to get the best use of the General Ledger functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: General Ledger Configuration/GLRC
    M3: Configuring Lot and Allocation Control Classroom This one-day course will help you get the most from the Lot and Allocation Control functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Lot and Allocation Control Configuration/WLAC
    M3: Configuring Manufacturing Order Classroom This one-day course will help you effectively use the Manufacturing Operations functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Manufacturing Order Configuration/MAOC
    M3: Configuring Purchase Orders Classroom This one-day course is designed for learners who wish to get the best use of the Supplier Purchase Management functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Purchase Order Configuration/POPC
    M3: Configuring Tactical and Operational Planning Classroom This two-day course will show you how to make the best use of the Tactical and Operational Planning functionality of Infor M3. The course addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration and covers the main programs used to implement the configuration once the needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Tactical and Operational Planning Configuration/TOPC
    M3: Configuring Warehouse Management Classroom This one-day course covers the Lot and Allocation Control functionality of Infor M3. It addresses a series of design questions to consider during configuration, as well as the main programs used to implement the configuration once business and system needs are defined.
    Previous course name/code: Warehouse Management Configuration/WHMC
    M3: Defining Style and Setup for Fashion Classroom This one-day course teaches how to setup Infor M3 Style and SKU. It provides information about the supporting setup like defining the options, features, connecting the options to features and creating the numbering rule. It also shows different ways to create an item and style item before the actual generation of SKU. It demonstrates how to cost an SKU and set a sales price for the whole style item.
    Previous course name/code: Style and Setup for Fashion/FSSKU
    M3: Designing Mashups (v10) - Advanced Classroom This course are for people who have attended the Infor Mashup designer introduction course and like to continue building the knowledge around the Mashup designer tool. This day is spent on more advanced controls like MI, Custom list, use a script to trigger a Mashup in a M3 program, localization and deployment. During the day you will get hints and tips to support your development of new Mashup.
    Infor Mashup Designer is an M3 and external source remix tool that helps build horizontal, processoriented screens. This means that the tool makes it possible to combine information from several external and M3 sources and also to display selected fields from different panels on one screen. This course covers the more advanced controls like MI, custom list, use a script to trigger a Mashup in a M3 program, localization, and deployment.
    Previous course name/code: Mashup Designer Advanced for M3/SMMA2. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Designing Mashups (v10) - Introduction Classroom This introduction course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully create and implement Mashup by using the Mashup Designer tool.
    Infor Mashup Designer is an M3 and external source remix tool that helps build horizontal, processoriented screens. This means that the tool makes it possible to combine information from several external and M3 sources and also to display selected fields from different panels on one screen. This course covers the basic functions of Infor Mashup Designer.
    Previous course name/code: Mashup Designer Introduction for M3/SMMA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Developing Smart Office Personalized Script Classroom This course teaches you how to personalize your Smart Office using personalized Script.
    Previous course name/code: Smart Office Personalized Script M3SMOJ. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Enabling ESM&R Classroom This five-day course is a foundation for consultants who will be working with the ESM&R 1.x solution. It will provide learners with knowledge on how to efficiently support aspects of the solution which include maintenance orders and work orders, including warranty entitlement and core handling. Learners will work through scenarios that illustrate the functionality available in Quickstep ESMR. Note that: ESM&R 1.x uses maintenance orders and work orders to service and repair equipment. Lawson M3 for ESM&R uses service orders and service agreements instead. Previous course name/code: ESM&R Enablement/ESMREN
    M3: Equipment Foundation Classroom This course introduces the Infor M3 Office Suite, an intuitive, personalized user interface that allows users to directly access Infor and Microsoft applications and update data pervasively and instantly across the applications. Infor is bringing together Microsoft productivity, mobility and collaboration tools, such as Microsoft Excel, Outlook, Word, PowerPoint and Groove, with Infor enterprise applications and business intelligence capabilities. This training is for version(s): 13.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: ESM&R Learning Camp/QSESMR. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Exam for Adaptation Kit Online The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics: M3 Java Standard Programming and the M3 Adaptation Kit. This exam is applicable to version 10.1. This is a timed, two-hour long exam. You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
    M3: Exam for System Fundamentals for Technical Consultants Online
    The purpose of this exam is to assess your knowledge on the following topics:  System Foundation Overview, SQL Query Introduction, M3 Database Overview.
    This exam is applicable to version 10.1. This is a timed, two-hour long exam.
    You must finish the exam in one sitting to receive credit for completing it. At the conclusion of the exam, you will be shown your score. Each subsequent time you open the exam, it will restart from the beginning, even if you’ve completed it.
    Duration: Self-paced
    M3: Food and Beverage Learning Camp Classroom
    M3: Implementing Business Performance Warehouse Classroom This course covers how to design, build, and deploy one M3 Analytics solution from end to end. The learners will work through understanding a sales requirement, mapping and designing the solution, building a Data Warehouse and Star Schema along with ETL job management using Infor BPW Version 10. In addition to this the learners will build a Microsoft OLAP cube and Microsoft 2010 Excel dashboard to deliver the information identified within the requirement process.
    Previous course name/code: Business Performance Warehouse for M3/BPWM3. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Implementing Costing Toolbox Classroom This half-day course provides better visibility of the cost and contribution margin, enabling you to compare costs for different kinds of products not only side by side, but across facilities and divisions. This course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully implement and use Infor M3 Costing Toolbox.
    Previous course name/code: Costing Toolbox/COSTBX
    M3: Implementing Delivery Regrouping Classroom In a world of globalization where customer demands on suppliers for product availability become increasingly stringent, Delivery Regrouping is the perfect tool. In this half-day course, you will learn how Delivery Regrouping can help you to strengthen your company’s competitive advantage by simplification and increased flexibility and visibility, as well as intelligent automation. The goal of this course is to successfully implement and use Infor M3 10.1 Delivery Regrouping.
    Previous course name/code: Delivery Regrouping/DELRGP
    M3: Implementing Inventory Leveling Classroom Infor M3 10.1 Inventory Leveling functionality is a way to automatically move existing excess goods to where they are better suited. The inventory leveling is based on target and maximum stock values which can be defined both as quantities and as coverage days. The goal of this half-day course is to successfully implement and use Infor M3 10.1 Inventory Leveling.
    Previous course name/code: Inventory Leveling/INVLEV
    M3: Implementing Package Management Classroom The purpose of Package Management functionality is to be able to manage a package as a logistical and storable unit throughout the normal logistics flow within a warehouse. This includes inbound and outbound processes as well as some normal in-house activities. The purpose is also to increase efficiency in the warehouse by enabling package-management-related tasks to be performed from an external system such as a handheld device. This half-day course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully implement and use Infor M3 Package Management.
    Previous course name/code: Package Management/PCKMGT
    M3: Implementing Process Automation Classroom This three-day course that provides the functionality of the two components for Process Automation:
    - Process Designer 
    - Process Server(Administration in Landmark Rich Client) 
    This course provides practical, hands-on experience using the Process Designer and Process Server Administrator and is conducted on Process Automation 10.0.2, with the Landmark application 10.0.2.5 and is bound to M3 13.1, M3 14.1 and LSO 10.0.4.
    This training is applicable for the following product versions:
    - Process Automation 10.0.2
    - Landmark Application 10.0.2.5
    - M3 13.1 and 14.1 
    - LSO 10.0.4
    Previous course name/code: Process Automation for Infor M3/LPAM3
    M3: Implementing ProcessFlow Integrator Classroom ProcessFlow Integrator provides the functionality for business process automation and integration. This three-day course focuses on providing practical ProcessFlow building exercises using the ProcessFlow Designer activity nodes listed below, and the functionality provided in the ProcessFlow Integrator product version 9.0.3. The M3 ProcessFlow Integrator Custom Solutions Workshop workbook is designed to be used in conjunction with the ProcessFlow Administration Guide.
    Previous course name/code: ProcessFlow Integrator for M3/PFI
    M3: Implementing Smart Office Improvements Classroom This half-day course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully personalize Infor M3 Smart Office views as well as search for information using ION Enterprise Search.
    Previous course name/code: Smart Office Improvements M3/SMPIMP
    M3: Implementing Supply Chain Order Classroom In a world of globalization with supply chains of growing complexity, Supply Chain Orders are the perfect tool. In this course, you will learn how SCOs strengthen your company’s competitive advantage by simplifying and increasing flexibility, visibility, and intelligent automation. The goal of this half-day course is to implement and use Lawson M3 10.1 Supply Chain Orders (SCO) successfully.
    Previous course name/code: Supply Chain Orders/SUPCHO
    M3: Introducing Customer Lifecycle Management (CLM) Online
    The purpose of this course is to provide an introduction to Customer Lifecycle Management (CLM) including both the background of the product and the supported processes. This is 1 hour eLearning course applicable for CLM version 15.2 in connection to Infor M3 version 13.1 (10.1 or later). (Course code: 01_0111310_EEN0337).
    M3: Introducing the Solution (v10) Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a company. This course allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of the company as an integrated business solution.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Solution Overview/MES. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Introducing the Technical Analytics Classroom This two-day course provides learners with an understanding of the technical aspects of the M3 Analytics solution. Attendees will learn how to use the data warehouse tool Business Performance Warehouse (BPW) to install Business Measurement Models (BMMs), and Microsoft Analysis Services to install OLAP cubes to facilitate multi-dimensional reporting. Learners will also formulate an understanding of Extract, Transform and Load (ETL) routines to populate the data warehouse and OLAP cubes using M3 data.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Technical Analytics/M3AT
    M3: Introducing the Technology Classroom This course gives you a basic understanding of the M3 technical framework and of the product offered. The course is designed to demonstrate the technical architecture of the different components, as well as explain what they are used for. The course will also discuss the common terminologies used in the area of Java Foundation and Tools.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Technology Overview/M3TO. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning M3 5.2 Manufacturing Operations Online M3: Learning M3 5.2 Manufacturing Operations (Training Material Package)
    M3: Learning M3 5.2 Supply Chain Management Online M3: Learning M3 5.2 Supply Chain Management (Training Material Package)
    M3: Learning M3 7.1 Netchanges Online M3: Learning M3 7.1 Netchanges (Training Material Package)
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Distribution Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a distribution company. This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of a distribution company as an integrated business solution. The learners execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available functionality.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Distribution Learning Camp/QSDS. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for EAM Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a plant or facility company. This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of a plant or facility as an integrated business solution. The learners execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available functionality.
    Previous course name/code: M3 EAM Learning Camp/QSEAM. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for ESM&R Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes for equipment service management and rental companies. It allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions as an integrated business solution. In the class, attendees execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate the functionality available.
    Previous course name/code: M3 ESM&R Learning Camp/QSESMR. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Fashion Manufacturing Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge how Infor M3 focuses on building an integrated foundation for the core needs and processes of the fashion industry for apparel cut and sew manufacturers (contract manufacturers).
    Previous course name/code: M3 Fashion Learning Camp - Manufacturing/QSFSM. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Fashion Sourcing Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge how Infor M3 focuses on building an integrated foundation for the core needs and processes of the fashion industry from design, source, distribute companies (brand owners).
    Previous course name/code: M3 Fashion Learning Camp - Sourcing/QSFSS. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Food and Beverage Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a food & beverage company. This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of a food & beverage company as an integrated business solution. The learners execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available functionality.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Food & Beverage Learning Camp/QSFB. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Manufacturing Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a manufacturing company. This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of a manufacturing company as an integrated business solution. The learners execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available functionality.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Manufacturing Learning Camp/QSMAN. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the Fundamentals for Standard Manufacturing Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how Infor M3 manages and integrates the business processes for a manufacturing company. It allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions as an integrated business solution. In the class, attendees execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate the functionality available.
    Previous course name/code: Standard Manufacturing Learning Camp/MVC10. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Learning the M3 Fundamentals Classroom This nine-day program covers how M3 manages and integrates the business processes of a manufacturing company. In the class, learners will execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available functionality. Learners will also learn to make the best use of Lawson Smart Office user interface through personalization that enables to adapt the user interface to the different business processes. They will also be able perform intuitive, simple-to-use search application for all Lawson data – similar to Google. Mashup Designer is an M3 and external source remix tool that helps build horizontal, process-oriented screens. This means that the tool makes it possible to combine information from several external and M3 sources and also to display selected fields from different panels on one screen. Learners will also learn how successfully create and implement Mashup by using the Mashup Designer tool. In the SQL course, they will learn how to query a database, the correct syntax to do it, more advanced syntax involving multiple tables and ends with how they can export the data from Infor M3. It also covers how to create, update and delete tables and records. M3 Ad Hoc Reporting is a tool that enables the creation of operational reports and listings direct from the M3 application database. Learners will learn how to design, develop, store, execute and schedule user defined reports, which are delivered in standard XML format.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Fundamentals Training/M3FND
    M3: Processing Accounts Payable Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Accounts Payable. This helps you to process supplier invoices and perform invoice match to purchase orders, process manual and automated supplier payments and monitor accounts payable.
    Previous course name/code: Accounts Payable Processing /APLL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Accounts Receivable Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Accounts Receivable. This helps you to process manual customer invoices and customer payments, manage customer debts, and print different types of documents for customer follow-up.
    Previous course name/code: Accounts Receivable Processing /ARLL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Bulk Orders Classroom This half-day course is a response to a requirement from our customers whose own customers ask them to guarantee availability of a quantity of product for a future time period without being specific about when within that period they will actually request delivery. The goal of this course is to successfully implement and use Infor M3 10.1 Bulk Orders.
    Previous course name/code: Bulk Orders/BULORDL
    M3: Processing Core Handling for ESM&R Classroom This three-day course will show you how to effectively use Infor Core Handling for the Equipment Service Management and Rental industry. This includes core handling setup to support the purchase, sale, remanufacture and maintenance of core equipment. Previous course name/code: ESM&R Core Handling/ESMCRH.
    M3: Processing Costing and Internal Accounting Classroom This course will provide you with a thorough understanding of M3 Financial Controlling including internal accounting and purchase, distribution, and product costing.
    Previous course name/code: Costing and Internal Accounting/COSIA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Customer Orders for Fashion Classroom This two-day course teaches how to set up, use, and maintain Infor Customer Order Processing specifically for the Fashion industry. In the Fashion industry, the process of Order Fulfillment (Customer Order Processing) is referred to as Order-to-Cash for Fashion. It provides best practices for managing order flow and related functionality which include reliable order information to customers and internal departments, proactively identify delivery problems in the supply chain and reschedule orders as needed, manages stock and credit adjustments, create business specific pricing and discount models and lastly manage bulk orders. This course is created for version 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions. Previous course name/code: Customer Order Processing for Fashion/FSSLS.
    M3: Processing Distribution Order Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Distribution Order Processing. This helps you to bring increased speed and quality to your supply chain, which means reduced costs and improved delivery precision and credibility.
    Previous course name/code: Distribution Order Processing/DOPL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Financial Accounting for ESM&R Classroom This four-day course will help you use Infor M3 Financial Accounting for the Equipment Service Management and Rental industry effectively. This includes understanding the main functions of the financial accounting department and how those functions are supported by Lawson M3. Previous course name/code: M3 Financial Accounting for ESM&R/ESMRFA.
    M3: Processing Financial Controlling for ESM&R Classroom This three-day course will provide you with a thorough understanding of M3 Financial Controlling for the Equipment Service and Rental Industry, including internal accounting and purchase, distribution, and maintenance costing. Previous course name/code: M3 Financial Controlling for ESM&R/ESMRFC.
    M3: Processing Finished Goods Allocation for Fashion Classroom This one-day course explains the business uses for lot and allocation control and how it integrates with other Infor M3 modules. You will be able to learn how to manage automatic allocation as well as perfoming manual allocation. It also describes how lot handling is managed in Infor M3. You will be able to generate, trace, reclassify, and display lots. This course is created for version 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions. Previous course name/code: Finished Goods Allocation for Fashion/FSALL.
    M3: Processing Fixed Assets Classroom This one-day course will help you to understand the main functions of product and purchase costing and how Infor M3 supports those functions. Previous course name/code: Fixed Assets Introduction/HFA10.
    M3: Processing Forecasts Classroom This three-day course that explains how you can get the most out of the Infor M3 forecasting module. M3 offers a powerful toolbox for managing the forecasting of products at different planning levels and different levels of complexity. M3 forecasting is integrated with customer order processing, sales and customer order statistics, master production scheduling, material planning, and distribution requirements planning.
    Previous course name/code: Forecasting/FORL
    M3: Processing General Ledger Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 General Ledger. This helps you to perform daily, periodic and yearly routines, verify general ledger transactions, and monitor performance with help of balance keys and the balance file.
    Previous course name/code: General Ledger Processing /GLRL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Leasing Management for ESM&R Classroom This two-day course will help you to effectively use Infor M3 Leasing Management for the Equipment Service Management & Rental industry. This will help you to customize and streamline your agreement handling, and minimize administration costs. Previous course name/code: Leasing Management for ESM&R/ESMRLM.
    M3: Processing Lot and Allocation Control Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Lot and Allocation control. This helps you to manage the disposal and tracing of inventory balances for all types of products from simple stock keeping units to lot controlled products.
    Previous course name/code: Lot and Allocation Control Processing/WLAL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Manufacturing Orders (v10) Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Manufacturing Order Processing. This helps you to achieve high customer service, low working capital levels, and optimum utilization of resources.
    Previous course name/code: Manufacturing Order Processing /MAOL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Procurement for ESM&R Classroom This two-day course will show you how to use Infor M3 Procurement for the Equipment Service Management and Rental industry. This will help you to support aspects of procurement such as identifying what to buy, requisitioning, and purchase order processing. Previous course name/code: Procurement for ESM&R/ESRMRPUR.
    M3: Processing Purchase Order Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Purchase Order Processing. This helps you to efficiently support aspects of procurement such as identifying what to buy, requisitioning and purchase order processing.
    Previous course name/code: Purchase Order Processing/POPL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Purchase Order for Fashion Classroom This two-day course teaches how to set up, use, and maintain Infor Purchase Order Processing specifically for the Fashion industry. You will be able to define key functions that make up purchase processing, identify activities it supports, describe how it integrates with other M3 modules, understand key steps for purchase processing, list parameters and basic data needed before performing purchase order processing. This course is created for version 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions. Previous course name/code: Purchase Order Processing for Fashion/FSPOP.
    M3: Processing Rental Management for ESM&R Classroom This three-day course will help you to effectively use Infor M3 Rental Management for the Equipment Service Management & Rental industry. This includes basic agreement handling as well as cross-rental integration.  Previous course name/code: Rental Management for ESM&R/ESMRRM.
    M3: Processing Sales and Order Delivery for ESM&R Classroom This three-day course will help you to effectively use Infor M3 Sales & Order Delivery for the Equipment Service Management & Rental industry. This includes sales of equipment as well as sales of spare parts. Previous course name/code: Sales and Order Delivery for ESM&R/ESMRSOD.
    M3: Processing Service Management for ESM&R Classroom This four-day course will show you how to effectively use Infor M3 Service Management for the Equipment Service Management & Rental industry. This includes all functions related directly to service orders, which starts with the entry or creation of an order that itemizes the services to be performed. Subsequent activities include determining warranty considerations, receiving the unit into the system, generating work authorizations, completing the specified work, reporting the work activities, delivering the equipment back to its owner, and invoicing the customer for the service or services performed. Previous course name/code: Service Management for ESM&R/ESMRSM.
    M3: Processing Service Orders Classroom This three-day course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Service Order Processing Module. Previous course name/code: Service Order Processing/SRVL.
    M3: Processing Tactical and Operational Planning Classroom This three day course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Tactical and Operational Planning, which is a powerful toolbox for managing the planning, scheduling and fulfilment of the extended supply chain. This helps you to increase visibility and improve material flow throughout the supply chain, as well as free up capital tied up in inventories and increases resource utilization, resulting in optimized service levels and maximized profitability.
    Previous course name/code: Tactical and Operational Planning/TOPL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Warehouse and Inventory Management for ESM&R Classroom This three-day course will show you how to use Infor M3 Warehouse and Inventory Management for the Equipment Service Management and Rental industry. This includes all functions directly or indirectly related to logistics at your company.  Previous course name/code: Warehouse and Inventory Management for ESMR/ESMRWI.
    M3: Processing Warehouse Management Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Warehouse Management. This helps you to support all functions directly or indirectly related to logistics at your company.
    Previous course name/code: Warehouse Management Processing/WHML. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Processing Warehouse Management for Fashion Classroom This two-day course describes how Infor M3 manages and integrates in a warehouse. You will be able to setup inventory structure and create and manage item related information. This course will also demonstrate different methods to move stock between locations within a warehouse. You will learn how to manage your requisitions and display and analyze information about stock and inventory. This course is created for version M3 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions.
    Previous course name/code: Warehouse Management for Fashion/FSWHM
    M3: Programming in Java Classroom This eight-day course gives developers an understanding of how to create different customizations to Infor M3 Java source code using M3 Adaptation Kit. The course consists of theory mixed with practical exercises. This course is an important step in preparing you for the exam required for Certification in MAK.
    Previous course name/code: Java Programming Workshop/MJSP. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Programming in Software Development Kit (SDK) Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to develop Smart Office applications using the SDK and WPF (Windows Presentation Foundation). This course incorporates instructor demonstrations, hands-on student activities, and practice sessions on how to create applications and Mashup controls in Visual Studio, and how to deploy them with some of the unique features in Smart Office.
    Previous course name/code: Infor Smart Office Software Development Kit (SDK) Overview/SDKO. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Stepping Up Financial Management (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This two-day course is aimed at customers currently running Infor M3 5.2 and will show learners what’s new and improved in Infor M3 7.1 and M3 10.1 Financial Management compared to the previous version as well sharpen the learner’s skills by using Infor M3 10.1. Previous course name/code: Stepping Up Financial Management 5.2 >10.1/SUFIN10.
    M3: Stepping Up Financial Management (7.1 to 10.1) Classroom This one-day course is aimed at customers currently running Infor M3 7.1 and will show learners what’s new and improved in Infor M3 10.1 Financial Management compared to the previous version as well sharpen the learner’s skills by using Infor M3 10.1. Previous course name/code: Stepping Up Financial Management 7.1 >10.1/FIN7TO10.
    M3: Stepping Up for Customer Sales Management (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This one-day course is aimed at customers currently running earlier versions of Movex/M3. A follow up to the Stepping Up Camp, it focuses on the changes in sales and purchase management. Learn how to optimize your business processes using the new user interface Infor Smart Office and the enhanced functionality in Infor M3 10.1 applications. The course will show learners what is new and improved compared to previous versions of M3, and sharpen the learners’ skills in using the system by using Infor M3 10.1. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Customer Sales Management/SUSLS10.
    M3: Stepping Up for Distribution (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 Distribution who are, or are considering, stepping up from their existing version. The course provides hands on approach to the core processes within the distribution industry, using the M3 V10.1 for distribution solution. This will introduce new design and functions available within the current version. This is followed on day 3 with a summary of overall changes that have occurred between the customer’s current version and the new M3 Version 10.1. The content of the summary is tailored to align with the customer’s current version of M3 and provides an insight into the important changes to be considered when embarking on an M3 stepping up project within Infor for Distribution. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Camp for Distribution/SUDIS10.
    M3: Stepping Up for ESM&R (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This four-day course introduces how Infor M3 10.1 manages and integrates the business processes for equipment service management and rental companies. This course takes a hands-on approach that allows users to gain an understanding of the operational activities necessary to run the core functions of these companies as an integrated business solution. In the class, the attendees execute basic functions, learn the different settings and work through scenarios that illustrate available design and functionality in the current version, as well as gain an understanding of what is new and different compared to the version you are currently running. Previous course name/code: Stepping Up ESMR Camp/SUESMR.
    M3: Stepping Up for Fashion (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 Fashion who are, or are considering, stepping up from their existing version. The course provides hands on approach to the core processes within the Fashion industry, using the M3 V10.1 for Fashion solution. This will introduce new design and functions available within the current version. This is followed on day 3 with a summary of overall changes that have occurred between the customer’s current version and the new M3 Version 10.1. The content of the summary is tailored to align with the customer’s current version of M3 and provides an insight into the important changes to be considered when embarking on an M3 stepping up project within Infor for Fashion. Previous course name/code: Stepping Up Camp For Fashion/SUFSH10.
    M3: Stepping Up for Food and Beverage (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 who are, or are considering, stepping up from their existing version. The course provides hands on approach to the core processes within the food and beverage industry, using the M3 10.1 solution. This will introduce new design and functions available within the current version. This is followed on day 3 with a summary of overall changes that have occurred between the customer’s current version and the new M3 10.1. The content of the summary is tailored to align with the customer’s current version of M3 and provides an insight into the important changes to be considered when embarking on an M3 stepping up project within Infor for Food and Beverage. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Camp for Food and Beverage/SUFAB10.
    M3: Stepping Up for Manufacturing (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 Manufacturing who are, or are considering, stepping up from their existing version. The course provides hands on approach to the core processes within the manufacturing industry, using the M3 V10.1 for manufacturing solution. This will introduce new design and functions available within the current version. This is followed on day 3 with a summary of overall changes that have occurred between the customer’s current version and the new M3 Version 10.1. The content of the summary is tailored to align with the customer’s current version of M3 and provides an insight into the important changes to be considered when embarking on an M3 stepping up project within Infor for Manufacturing. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Camp for Manufacturing/SUMAN10.
    M3: Stepping Up Overview (7.1 to 10.1) Classroom This half-day course will provide the information you need to successfully explain the new and changed functionality in Infor M3 10.1. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Overview/SUOVW10L.
    M3: Stepping Up Planning and Manufacturing (7.1 to 10.1) Classroom This one-day course covers Inventory Leveling which enables you to automatically move excess stock between replenishment warehouses and distribution centers. It is based on target and maximum quantities or coverage days and is able to identify excess stock situations. Supply Chain Orders enables the whole manufacturing process to be viewed without the need for a customer requirement. Product can be built in advance and reserved for customers. This course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully implement and use Infor M3 Inventory Leveling and Supply Chain Orders. Previous course name/code: Planning & Manufacturing 7.1 > 10.1/PMF7TO10.
    M3: Stepping Up Planning and Manufacturing Operations (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This one and a half-day course is aimed at customers currently running earlier versions of Movex/M3, as a follow up after the Stepping Up Camp. It focuses on the changes in supply chain planning and manufacturing operations. Learn how to optimize your business processes using the new user interface Infor Smart Office and the enhanced functionality in Infor M3 10.1 applications. The course will show learners what’s new and improved compared to previous versions of M3 and sharpen the learners’ skills in using the system by using Infor M3 10.1. Previous course name/code: Stepping up Planning and Manufacturing Operations/SUSCP10.
    M3: Stepping Up Procurement, Warehouse and Logistics (7.1 to 10.1) Classroom This one-day course covers Delivery Regrouping which gives the user the possibility to create preliminary deliveries as an integrated part of the order entry. When more information is available you could start planning the deliveries and transform them to firm deliveries. As soon as the firm delivery is created it is part of the standard dispatch flow in M3. Package Management enables you to manage packages as a logistical and storable unit throughout the normal logistical flow within a warehouse. The purpose is also to increase efficiency in the warehouse by enabling package-management-related tasks to be performed from an external system such as a handheld device. This course will provide the information and practice you need to successfully implement and use Infor M3 Delivery Regrouping and Package Management. Previous course name/code: Procurement, Warehouse & Logistics 7.1 > 10.1/PWL7TO10.
    M3: Stepping Up Rental (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 who are stepping up from their existing version. The course provides hands on approach to the core processes within the rental industry, using Infor M3 10.1, and it will introduce new design and functions available within this new version. This is followed on day three with a tailored summary of overall changes that have occurred between the customer’s current version and the new M3 version (10.1) in order to provide an insight into the important changes to be considered when embarking on an M3 stepping up project. Previous course name/code: Stepping Up Rental Learning Camp/SUREN10.
    M3: Stepping Up System Administration (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This four-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 who are, or are considering, stepping up from their existing M3 Java version. The course provides hands on approach to the M3 system administration, using the M3 V10.1. This will introduce new tools and functions available within the current version. Previous course name/code: System Administration Stepping Up 5.2 - 10.1/MJSU.
    M3: Stepping Up System Administration (7.1 to 10.1) Classroom This three-day course is a foundation for existing customers of Infor M3 who are, or are considering, stepping up from 7.1 to the M3 V10.1. The course provides hands on approach to the M3 system administration, using the M3 V10.1. This will introduce new tools and functions available within the current version. Previous course name/code: System Administration Stepping Up 7.1 - 10.1/SYS7TO10.
    M3: Stepping Up to 10.1 Classroom This four-day course focuses on the changes in Infor M3 10.1. The course will show attendees what’s new and improved compared to previous version of M3 and sharpen the attendees’ skills in implementing the system using Infor M3 10.1. The major changes included are in Customer Sales Management, Warehousing and Logistics as well as Planning and Manufacturing. This course takes a hands-on approach allowing attendees to setup or review configuration rules and performs the flows using the setup. Previous course name/code: M3 10.1 Stepping up Labs/APPS7TO10.
    M3: Stepping Up Warehouse, Logistics and Procurement (5.2 to 10.1) Classroom This two-day course is aimed at customers currently running earlier versions of Movex/M3, as a follow up after the Stepping Up Camp focusing on the changes in warehouse, logistics and procurement. Learn how to optimize your business processes using the new user interface Smart Office and the enhanced functionality in Infor M3 10.1 applications. The course will show learners what’s new and improved compared to previous versions of M3 and sharpen the learner’s skills in using the system by using Infor M3 10.1.  Previous course name/code: Stepping up Warehouse, Logistics and Procurement/SUSCM10.
    M3: Technical Walk-through of Infor Analytics v10.1.0 Online AGENDA:
    - Architecture
    - End to End Walkthrough
    M3: Technology Overview Classroom This half day course gives you a basic understanding of the M3 technical framework and of the product offered. The course is designed to demonstrate the technical architecture of the different components, as well as explain what they are used for. The course will also discuss the common terminologies used in the area of Java Foundation and Tools.  
    Previous course name/code: M3 Technology Overview /M3TO
    M3: Using Crystal Reports Classroom This three-day course covers how to build and format reports in Crystal Reports XI R2. It provides instruction on the basics of the Crystal Reports product and students will learn the key functions and concepts of this application to develop reports. In a highly hands-on mode, the course explains how to build and format reports in Crystal Reports XI R2. This course also discusses linking, charting and cross tabs, as well as basic architecture and the use of parameters to tailor reports. Previous course name/code: Crystal Reports (M3)/CR11ORD.
    M3: Using ION Enterprise Search Classroom This half day course provides an overview of Infor Enterprise Search and how to use and administer it. Infor Enterprise Search enables learners to perform intuitive, simple-to-use search application for all Infor data – similar to Google.
    Previous course name/code: ION Enterprise Search for M3/LES. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Using LBI Classroom This course will help you develop solutions to operational business intelligence needs with the core, integrated products of Infor Business Intelligence. After presenting the steps to publish, burst and schedule reports with Reporting Services and to create data-triggered notifications with Smart Notification, this course culminates in the building and deployment of role-based dashboards with Enterprise Framework Services to deliver that content, as well as information from other sources.
    Previous course name/code: LBI Foundations M3/LBIF. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Using Report Generator Classroom This one-day course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 General Ledger. This helps you to perform daily, periodic and yearly routines, verify general ledger transactions, and monitor performance with help of balance keys and the balance file. Previous course name/code: Report Generator/RGRL.
    M3: Using Smart Data Tool Classroom Infor SmartData Tool is a 1-day instructor-led course that introduces learners to the Infor SmartData Tool (SDT). It describes how the tool uses Excel worksheets for its input data, and Infor Web Services to pass that data into the M3 application.
    Previous course name/code: Smart Data Tool/SDT. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Using SQL Classroom This course is a complete SQL course that starts from the very beginning with prerequisites for querying a database, the syntax to do it, more advanced syntax involving multiple tables and ends with how you can export your data from Infor M3. It also covers how to create, update, and delete tables and records.
    Previous course name/code: SQL for Infor M3/SQLI. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: Using the M3 Adaptation Kit (MAK) Classroom Attendees will learn to use Eclipse/MAK to modify view definitions, OUT interfaces, language files and field helps. The course consists of theoretical instruction mixed with practical exercises. This course aims to provide you with the knowledge for using MAK and includes:
  • MAK overview: concepts, versions, Eclipse and supported processes
  • M3 Java environments: design, file structure and configuration principles
  • The MAK perspective, views, information sources, and setup
  • Development process: action logging, lock rules and status handling, import rules, deploy procedure
  • Development tools/editors to modify view definitions, OUT interfaces, language files and help texts and Debugging in simple (read-only) mode
  • Version control in MAK-based development
  • Previous course name/code: M3 Adaptation Kit/MAKS. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.

     

    M3: v10 Administering Documents and Media Classroom This course will provide an understanding of the media flow and how it is connected to StreamServe, setting up a M3 media flow, and tracing, deleting and resending an output. This course is created for version 5.4 of StreamServe and M3 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions. Previous course name/code: M3 Document and Media Administration/MOUTA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Administering Security Classroom The Infor M3 security model covers the mechanisms available inside the application to control access at various levels, such as at the initial logon process, through access to various environments, grid security, companies and divisions, to the authority to perform individual functions, and ultimately into protecting data and even controlling access to individual fields on a screen. It teaches you how to administer security at individual or group/role level. Hands-on exercises will give you the opportunity to practice what has been learned. This course is created for gridded Infor versions 10.1 and May 2011 HB and Higher. Previous course name/code: System Administration Security (M3)/MJSE. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Administering the System - Advanced Classroom This course develops the knowledge gained in the M3: Administering the System – Introduction course. By building on the concepts covered in the introduction course, it aims to teach the methods used to manage the more complex areas of the installation. Content applies to gridded Infor versions 10.1 and May 2011 HB and Higher.
    This course covers managing and scheduling jobs, configuring the servers and services involved in M3 Output Solution, and routing users’ printed output to the correct printer, e-mail, fax, etc. Separate sections discuss working with program fixes and modifications, how these are configured, and how to detect which versions are in use in different environments. In the Grid Work Management section, participants are shown how to change the runtime behavior of the M3 application. The course also covers copying/moving data between environments. It aims to teach you the knowledge required to become more self-sufficient in managing your Infor M3 installation. Previous course name/code: System Administration Advanced (M3)/MJAA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Administering the System - Introduction Classroom Teaches the concepts, structure and basic functionality of the M3 Business Engine in all approved platforms. Content applies to gridded Infor versions 10.1 and May 2011 HB and higher.
    This course introduces the various servers and software components in a gridded Infor M3 installation, the basic architecture of the product, basics of the Infor Grid and concepts such as M3 environments, and M3 Companies and Divisions. The course also describes the file structure for the grid and core M3 applications. Participants will be introduced to the M3 management and monitoring interfaces, and shown some basic configuration options. Also covered are daily tasks such as enrolling users and configuring user menus. Previous course name/code: System Administration Introduction (M3)/MJAI. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Processing Customer Orders Classroom This course provides learners with knowledge on how to effectively use Infor M3 Customer Order Processing. This helps you to customize and streamline your ordering process so that it only includes activities that add customer value, thereby maximizing customer satisfaction and minimizing administration costs.
    Previous course name/code: Customer Order Processing/SLSL. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Using Smart Office - Advanced Online Infor Smart Office delivers an intuitive user interface that allows user-specific customization and personalization that puts the right tools and information on every user's screen. Infor M3 Enterprise Search is a deeply integrated, intuitive, simple-to-use search application for Infor and non-Lawson data to help organizations search and find relevant information securely and quickly.
    M3: v10 Using Smart Office - Advanced Classroom This course enables learners to make the best use of Infor Smart Office user interface through personalization that enables you to adapt the user interface to your business processes. Learners will also be able perform intuitive, simple-to-use search application for all Infor data – similar to Google.
    Previous course name/code: Smart Office - Advanced/SMOA. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Using Smart Office - Introduction Classroom This course enables learners to effectively use Infor Smart Office user interface. With this user interface, Infor is redefining how people will interact with their Infor applications. Smart Office is an easily deployed and managed client application located on a central server. It delivers an intuitive user interface that allows user-specific customization and personalization to put the right tools and information on every user's screen.
    Previous course name/code: Smart Office Introduction/SMOI. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Using Smart Office - Introduction Online Infor Smart Office is an interface to your Lawson applications. It is an information workplace that lets you customize forms and lists and collaborate with coworkers. Infor Smart Office also leverages Microsoft Office applications such as Word and Excel.
    M3: v10 Using the Output Designer Classroom This course will provide an understanding how StreamServe software supports the M3 Output Solution, learning to do customizations to an M3 output, making both basic and more advanced changes using script, organizing the document, and troubleshooting the output flow. This course is created for version 5.4 of StreamServe and M3 10.1, but is also applicable to all prior versions.
    Previous course name/code: M3 Output Designer/MOUTD. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10 Using Web Services Classroom This two-day course will provide you with an introduction to Infor Web Services, enabling you to understand the architecture, and to configure, model, test and deploy Web Services using Web Services Studio. Content applies to 9.2.0.0 LWS and above.
    Using Infor Web Service to configure, model, test and deploy Web Services using Web Services Studio. Configuring and authenticating Infor Web Services Servers. Creating, modeling, testing and deploying Web Services for M3 Interactive Programs. Creating, modeling, testing and deploying Web Services for M3 Interface Programs. This course is created for version to 9.2.0.0 LWS and above.
    Previous course name/code: Web Services Introduction/WESI. Click HERE to view course description and agenda.
    M3: v10x - v13x Application Foundation Differences Classroom
    M3: v10x - v13x Sales Differences Classroom
    M3: v10x Getting a Smarter Office Online The course is on the introduction level with the aim to give you examples of what can be done and hopefully inspire you to start using these features and tools to get more out of your Infor Smart Office installation. You will hopefully experience a new way of working, where Infor M3 becomes event driven and proactive in a way that you wouldn’t get if not using these tools. As part of the demonstration you will be shown how the tools can be implemented and at the end of the course you will be guided where you can learn more about each tool.
    M3: v10x Introducing Ad Hoc Reports Online Infor M3 Ad Hoc Reporting is a tool that enables the creation of operational reports and listings direct from the Infor M3 application database. Ad Hoc Reporting.
    M3: v10x Introducing Smart Reports Online Reporting is a vital method of deriving value from your ERP system – and it should be easy to do. Standard reports need to be easy to find, easy to use and also easy to personalize. Furthermore, when the data they generate is simple to reuse and distribute, their value increases even more. To get the most intelligence, you need a streamlined and smart way of managing and viewing all standard reports in your organization.
    M3: v10x Introducing the ION Grid Online The course aims to make everyone who works with configuring, administrating or trouble shooting Infor M3 Solution ION Grid environments have the same base level of knowledge which should enable them to work more effectively. After completing this course you should be able to: Understand and explain what Grid technology is and how it works within the Infor M3 solution context. Navigate through the ION Grid using Lifecycle Manager and Grid management pages. Carry out basic configuration of an ION Grid environment. Carry out basic trouble shooting within an ION Grid environment including collection of log files. At the end of the course there is an assessment.
    M3: v10x Managing the Demand Planner Online

    The goal of demand planning is to increase forecast accuracy, align cross-functional goals and enable more accurate supply planning. The return on investment comes from an improved customer service level, a reduced stock level, improved supply planning and lower operating costs. Lawson M3 Demand Planner (DMP) is a powerful tool that supports a collaborative workflow for reviewing sales forecasts and capturing market intelligence. Integrated forecast engine supports a large number of automatic forecast methods and competitive forecasting helps customers find the best fit among methods. Dynamic grouping and data aggregation enables customers to manipulate demand and forecast. Favorite views and exception management provide filtering and settings to guide users to their preferred information view. Demand Planner supports the generation of more accurate, one number, consensus forecasts to improve delivery performance, reduce finished goods inventory and avoid product obsolescence.

     

    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Payable for Distribution Online Accounts Payable is a complete solution for processing invoices and making payments efficiently and intelligently. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing allowing efficient invoice matching and supplier invoice approval.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Payable for ESM&R Online Accounts Payable is a complete solution for processing invoices and making payments efficiently and intelligently. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing allowing efficient invoice matching and supplier invoice approval.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Payable for Fashion Online Accounts Payable is a complete solution for processing invoices and making payments efficiently and intelligently. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing allowing efficient invoice matching and supplier invoice approval.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Payable for Food and Beverage Online Accounts Payable is a complete solution for processing invoices and making payments efficiently and intelligently. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing allowing efficient invoice matching and supplier invoice approval.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Payable for Manufacturing Online Accounts Payable is a complete solution for processing invoices and making payments efficiently and intelligently. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing allowing efficient invoice matching and supplier invoice approval.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Receivable for Distribution Online Accounts Receivable provides complete administration, monitoring and control of customer invoices, credit and payments. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Receivable for ESM&R Online Accounts Receivable provides complete administration, monitoring and control of customer invoices, credit and payments. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Receivable for Fashion Online Accounts Receivable provides complete administration, monitoring and control of customer invoices, credit and payments. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing. Within this Accounts Receivable section management of the risk associated with customer debt is also included.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Receivable for Fashion Online Accounts Receivable provides complete administration, monitoring and control of customer invoices, credit and payments. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing. Within this Accounts Receivable section management of the risk associated with customer debt is also included.
    M3: v10x Processing Accounts Receivable for Manufacturing Online Accounts Receivable provides complete administration, monitoring and control of customer invoices, credit and payments. The solution handles complex transactions quickly and automatically, minimizing the need for manual processing.
    M3: v10x Processing After Sales for ESM&R Online The sales process covered by these simulations relate to some specific after-sales scenarios which often arise in the ESM&R industry. A mechanism for correcting invoices in a controlled and unambiguous manner, providing a greater level of traceability as a result. Price adjustment order types also exist to control over or undercharged amounts. Customer receive goods through the order fulfillment process but sometimes and for various reasons, those goods are returned by the customer who then expects to receive a credit note to offset the invoice they received for those goods. Separate routines are configured to deal with correcting errors in previously billed order changes. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXESMAS
    M3: v10x Processing Assembly for Distribution Online Distribution companies often need to deliver assembled products to customers. They don’t keep the assembled products in stock but only the components, and do the products assembly for answering to customer needs. Different process variants are described so you can select the most appropriate one(s). The ‘Assembly’ process may also be called ‘Light manufacturing’. The process begins with a customer order entry which creates the need and ends with the assembled product receipt in stock. The rest of the process, which is to deliver the goods etc…, is part of the dispatch process and is not explained here as it is the same as for any ordered item.
    M3: v10x Processing Asset Management for EAM Online The Asset Management process starts with evaluation of collected equipment statistics. From the statistics different decissions can be taken to make changes to equipment data, spare parts and services. If you look at the processes from an Equipment Life Cycle view you will see that parts of the Asset Management process is the ending point for the equipment life cycle.
    M3: v10x Processing Buy-to-Order for ESM&R Online The buy-to-order process is often an important process in the ESM&R Industry, where a purchase order may be raised in order to answer a special requirement, either for a catalog or for an extended catalog item. The process starts from the customer order entry which raises planned purchase orders. The linked customer order and purchase order are managed up to the supplier invoice matching and the customer order invoicing. Special features are fully taken into account such as: Extended catalog items, Sales and purchase prices, and Different physical flows. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXESMBT.
    M3: v10x Processing Buy-to-Order for ESM&R Online The buy-to-order process is often an important process in the ESM&R Industry, where a purchase order may be raised in order to answer a special requirement, either for a catalog or for an extended catalog item. The process starts from the customer order entry which raises planned purchase orders. The linked customer order and purchase order are managed up to the supplier invoice matching and the customer order invoicing. Special features are fully taken into account such as: Extended catalog items, Sales and purchase prices, and Different physical flows. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXESMBT.
    M3: v10x Processing Cash Desk Sales for Distribution Online The process starts from a customer order entry where the payment will be performed at a cash desk. Different alternatives are possible: Enter a customer order with an immediate and automatic dispatch and invoicing, and include the payment recording at a cash desk in the customer order flow. Enter a “normal” customer order and create an advance invoice; its payment will be recorded at a cash desk and may be integrated in the customer order flow too. Enter a “normal” customer order and dispatch and invoice it. Change the invoice properties so that the payment can be recorded at a cash desk, maybe together with other pending invoices. The payments are validated, normally once a day, so that they updated the finance and especially the sales ledger. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXDISCD
    M3: v10x Processing Cash Desk Sales for ESM&R Online The process starts from a customer order entry where the payment will be performed at a cash desk. Different alternatives are possible. You can enter a customer order with an immediate and automatic dispatch and invoicing, and include the payment recording at a cash desk in the customer order flow. You can enter a “normal” customer order and create an advance invoice; its payment will be recorded at a cash desk and may be integrated in the customer order flow too. You can enter a “normal” customer order and dispatch and invoice it. Change the invoice properties so that the payment can be recorded at a cash desk, maybe together with other pending invoices. The dispatch process involved in a cash sale is often a collection. When sold items are being collected (regardless of whether a cash payment is involved), the dispatch policy will create a delivery for that customer often with auto-allocation and auto-pick in action. The payments are validated, normally once a day, so that they updated the Finance and especially the sales ledger. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXESMCD
    M3: v10x Processing Core Handling for ESM&R Online The process starts from a customer order entry where the payment will be performed at a cash desk. Different alternatives are possible. You can enter a customer order with an immediate and automatic dispatch and invoicing, and include the payment recording at a cash desk in the customer order flow.  When sold items are being collected (regardless of whether a cash payment is involved), the dispatch policy will create a delivery for that customer often with auto-allocation and auto-pick in action. The payments are validated, normally once a day, so that they updated the Finance and especially the sales ledger.
    M3: v10x Processing Cost Accounting for ESM&R Online Cost Accounting covers the creation of internal accounting transactions, how to correct these transactions when necessary and how to analyze the transactions created for particular process flows.
    M3: v10x Processing Cost Accounting for Food and Beverage Online Cost Accounting covers the creation of standard cost records, how average costing is handled in Infor M3, the creation of internal accounting transactions, how to correct these transactions when necessary and internal accounting transactions associated with manufacturing orders.
    M3: v10x Processing Distribution Orders for Distribution Online The Distribution Orders process is used when transferring stock from one warehouse to another warehouse. The most typical case in the distribution industry is a stock transfer between a main warehouse where the goods have been received from a supplier and a regional warehouse where small quantities are kept in stock; but the process applies to all kinds of warehouse transfers, which may occur for different reasons. The process starts from the creation of a planned distribution order or from a firm distribution order and ends with the goods receipt and an internal invoice between the divisions, if the warehouses belong to different divisions within the same company.
    M3: v10x Processing Distribution Orders for Fashion Online The Move between Warehouses process is used when transferring stock from one warehouse to another warehouse. The transaction in Infor M3 is called Distribution Order (DO). The most typical case is a stock transfer between a main warehouse where the goods have been either produced or received from a supplier, and a regional warehouse where small quantities are kept in stock; but the process applies to all kinds of warehouse transfers, which may occur for different reasons. The process starts from the creation of a planned distribution order (planned warehouse transfer) as a result of the MRP (Materials Requirement Planning) or ROP (Reorder Point) calculation and ends with the goods receipt and an internal invoice between the Divisions, if the warehouses belong to different Divisions within the same Company. Distribution orders are normally not directly created: they are created from a demand, either through the MRP or ROP calculation or through a customer order. However, it is still possible to create distribution orders manually; in this case, a matrix order entry is available.
    M3: v10x Processing Distribution Orders for Food and Beverage Online The Distribution Orders process is used when transferring stock from one warehouse to another warehouse. The most typical case in the Food & Beverage Industry is a stock transfer between a main warehouse where the goods have been either produced or received from a supplier, and a regional warehouse where small quantities are kept in stock; but the process applies to all kinds of warehouse transfers, which may occur for different reasons. The process starts from the creation of a planned distribution order as a result of the MRP calculation and ends with the internal invoice between the Divisions, if we assume that the warehouses belong to different Divisions in a common Company. An alternative to this main process is when an item, which is normally stored in the main warehouse but not in the regional warehouse, must be delivered to a customer from the regional warehouse. In this case, a distribution order is created from a customer order; both orders are linked.
    M3: v10x Processing Distribution Orders for Manufacturing Online The Distribution Orders process is used when transferring stock from one warehouse to another warehouse. The most typical case in the manufacturing industry is a stock transfer between a main warehouse where the goods have been either produced or received from a supplier, and a regional warehouse where small quantities are kept in stock; but the process applies to all kinds of warehouse transfers, which may occur for different reasons. The process starts from the creation of a distribution order proposal as a result of the MRP (Materials Requirement Planning) or ROP (Reorder Point) calculation and ends either with the goods receipt, or with the internal invoice between the Divisions, if the warehouses belong to different divisions in a same company.
    M3: v10x Processing Equipment for ESM&R Online The equipment main process is made of a number of supporting processes grouped into two main parts: Asset Management and Equipment Supporting Processes. The Equipment Profitability Portal is described in a separate course. This training is for version(s): 10.1 and all previous versions. Previous course name/code: QSXESMEQ.
    M3: v10x Processing Equipment Profitability for ESM&R Online Infor M3 Equipment